ST 3000 Smart Transmitter

Transcription

ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
Release 300 with HART Communications Option
User Manual
Doc. No.:
34-ST-25-17
Revision Date:
6/05
Notices and Trademarks
Notices and Trademarks
Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc.
June 2005
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may
be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and
specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Honeywell is a U.S. registered trademarks Of Honeywell Inc.
Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Honeywell International, Inc.
Industrial Measurement and Control
2500 W. Union Hills Drive
Phoenix, Arizona 85027
Patent Notice
This product is covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 4,520,488; 4,567,466; 4,494,183;
4,502,335; 4,592,002; 4,553,104; 4,541,282; 4,806,905; 4,797,669; 4,735,090; 4,768,382; 4,787,250;
4,888,992; 5,811,690; 5,875,150; 5,765,436; 4,734,873; 6,041,659 and other patents pending.
ii
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
About This Document
About This Document
Revision Notes
The following list provides notes concerning all revisions of this document.
Doc ID
Date
34-ST-25-17
Notes
st
9/99
1
7/00
Updated illustrations to show new terminal block (three screw
terminal) and R300 electronics housing.
10/04
Updated bolt torque specs, parts lists.
2/05
Updated for CFF Flange Mount
6/05
Updated with STA info.
issue of document.
Contacts
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our industrial automation and
control customers.
Honeywell Organization
WWW Address (URL)
Corporate
http://www.honeywell.com
Industrial Automation and Control
http://www.iac.honeywell.com
International
http://www.honeywell.com/Business/global.asp
Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.
Organization
6/05
Phone Number
United States and Canada
Honeywell Inc.
Industrial Automation and Control
1-800-343-0228
1-800-525-7439
Asia Pacific
Honeywell Asia Pacific Inc.
Hong Kong
(852) 8298298
Europe
Honeywell PACE
Brussels, Belgium
[32-2] 728-2111
Latin America
Honeywell Inc.
Sunrise, Florida U.S.A.
(305) 364-2355
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
Sales
Service
iii
About This Document
Technical Assistance
If you encounter a problem with your ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, check to see how your transmitter is
currently configured to verify that all selections are consistent with your application.
If the problem persists, you can reach Honeywell’s Solution Support Center for technical support by
telephone during normal business hours. An engineer will discuss your problem with you. Please have your
complete model number, serial number, and software revision number on hand for reference. You can find
the model and serial numbers on the transmitter nameplates. You may also seek additional help by
contacting the Honeywell distributor who supplied your ST 3000 transmitter.
Technical Assistance
Contact
Honeywell Solution Support Center
By Telephone
In the U. S: 1-800-423-9883
Outside the U.S:
1-602-313-6510
[email protected]
By E-mail
Problem Resolution
If it is determined that a hardware problem exists, a replacement transmitter or part will be shipped with
instructions for returning the defective unit. Please do not return your transmitter without authorization
from Honeywell’s Solution Support Center or until the replacement has been received.
Symbol definitions
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol
Definition
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.
This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.
WARNING: risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential shock
hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60
VDC may be accessible.
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to
Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.
iv
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
Contents
Contents
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only .................................................................... 1
Overview..............................................................................................................................................1
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters ...............................................................................................................2
HART Communicator ..........................................................................................................................7
Transmitter Order ................................................................................................................................8
Local Smart Meter Option ...................................................................................................................9
2— Quick Start Reference ....................................................................................... 11
Overview............................................................................................................................................11
Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly ..................................................................................12
3— Preinstallation Considerations ........................................................................... 13
Overview............................................................................................................................................13
CE Conformity (Europe) Notice.........................................................................................................13
Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter ...........................................................................................14
Considerations for HART communicator...........................................................................................16
Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option ...................................................................................16
4— Installation ......................................................................................................... 17
Overview............................................................................................................................................17
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter..........................................................................................................17
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter...............................................................................................................28
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter ..............................................................................................................33
5— Getting Started................................................................................................... 39
Overview............................................................................................................................................39
Establishing Communications ...........................................................................................................39
Making Initial Checks.........................................................................................................................42
6— Configuration ..................................................................................................... 45
Overview............................................................................................................................................45
Configuration Overview .....................................................................................................................46
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
v
Contents
Tag— Entering a Tag Number ..........................................................................................................55
PV unit— Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement .........................................................................56
Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV.................................................................................57
Device Information.............................................................................................................................59
Pressure transfer function— Selecting Output Conformity ...............................................................60
PV damping— Adjusting Damping Time ...........................................................................................62
SV units— Selecting Secondary Variable units ................................................................................63
Poll addr— Selecting Poll Address....................................................................................................64
Disconnecting the Communicator .....................................................................................................64
7— Start-up.............................................................................................................. 65
Overview............................................................................................................................................65
Start-up Tasks ...................................................................................................................................66
Running Analog Output .....................................................................................................................67
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter ...........................................................................................69
Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter ....................................................................................71
Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank........................................................................................73
Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank ................................................................................75
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter............................................................78
Pressure Measurement with AP........................................................................................................81
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals ................................................83
8— Operation........................................................................................................... 87
Introduction........................................................................................................................................87
Accessing Operation Data.................................................................................................................87
Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers ......................................................90
Writing Data in the Message Area.....................................................................................................92
Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database ..............................................................................93
9— Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 97
Introduction........................................................................................................................................97
Preventive Maintenance ....................................................................................................................97
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms ...................................................................................97
Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA).....................................................................................100
Replacing Meter Body .....................................................................................................................103
10— Calibration ..................................................................................................... 107
vi
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
Contents
Introduction......................................................................................................................................107
Overview..........................................................................................................................................107
Calibrating Analog Output Signal ....................................................................................................108
Calibrating Range............................................................................................................................109
Resetting Calibration .......................................................................................................................111
11— Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 113
Introduction......................................................................................................................................113
Troubleshooting Overview...............................................................................................................113
To access transmitter diagnostics ...................................................................................................113
Diagnostic Messages ......................................................................................................................114
Interpreting Messages .....................................................................................................................116
Clearing Critical Status ....................................................................................................................118
12— Parts List........................................................................................................119
Replacement Parts ..........................................................................................................................119
13— Reference Drawings ...................................................................................... 137
Wiring Diagrams ..............................................................................................................................137
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference ................................................................... 139
Introduction......................................................................................................................................139
Smart Meter Display ........................................................................................................................141
Smart Meter Specifications .............................................................................................................143
Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span).................................................................................144
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons..................................................................................147
Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator...........................................................160
Typical smart meter indications.......................................................................................................163
Operation error codes......................................................................................................................164
Meter/transmitter interaction............................................................................................................165
Appendix B— Configuration Record Sheet ............................................................ 167
ST 3000 R300 Smart Transmitter with HART Communications
.........................................................................................................................................................167
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters.................................................... 169
Possible Solutions/Methods ............................................................................................................169
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
vii
Contents
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications ...................................................... 179
Introduction......................................................................................................................................179
North American Hazardous Location Standards.............................................................................179
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications....................................................184
Enclosure Ratings ...........................................................................................................................187
Index ......................................................................................................................189
viii
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
Tables
Tables
Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family ..............................................................................................................5
Table 2 Local Smart Meter Options ............................................................................................................................10
Table 3 Start-up Tasks Reference................................................................................................................................12
Table 4 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluid DC200) .............................................15
Table 5 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings........................................................16
Table 6 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket ..................................................................................................18
Table 7 Zero Corrects Procedure for Transmitters with a Small Differential Pressure Span ......................................21
Table 8 Flush Mount Transmitter Installation .............................................................................................................24
Table 9 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter.............................................................................................26
Table 10 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Processes ..................................................................................29
Table 11 Process Connections .....................................................................................................................................30
Table 12 Flange Description........................................................................................................................................31
Table 13 Installing Flange Adapter .............................................................................................................................32
Table 14 Wiring the Transmitter .................................................................................................................................35
Table 15 Starting Communications with Transmitter..................................................................................................41
Table 16 Reviewing Factory-Set Configuration Parameters .......................................................................................42
Table 17 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters ......................................................................48
Table 18 Entering Tag Number ...................................................................................................................................55
Table 19 Selecting Engineering Units .........................................................................................................................56
Table 20 Keying in LRV and URV .............................................................................................................................57
Table 21 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures................................................................................................58
Table 22 Viewing/Entering Device Information Data.................................................................................................59
Table 23 Selecting Output Conformity........................................................................................................................60
Table 24 Adjusting Damping Time .............................................................................................................................62
Table 25 Selecting SV Temperature Units ..................................................................................................................63
Table 26 Selecting Poll Address..................................................................................................................................64
Table 27 Start-up Procedure Reference .......................................................................................................................66
Table 28 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode ...................................................................67
Table 29 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement.....................................................................................69
Table 30 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement ...............................................................................71
Table 31 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank...............................................73
Table 32 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank........................................76
Table 33 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement .....................................................79
Table 34 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement. ..............................................................................82
Table 35 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement .........................................83
Table 36 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access ....................................................................................88
Table 37 Changing Default Failsafe Direction or Write Protect Jumper.....................................................................91
Table 38 Writing Data in the Message Area................................................................................................................92
Table 39 Saving a Configuration Database .................................................................................................................94
Table 40 Downloading a Configuration Database.......................................................................................................95
Table 41 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms.............................................................................................100
Table 42 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings .............................................................................................................102
Table 43 Replacing PWA ..........................................................................................................................................102
Table 44 Replacing Meter Body Only.......................................................................................................................105
Table 45 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode.......................................................................110
Table 46 Calibrating Measurement Range ................................................................................................................111
Table 47 Resetting Calibration Data..........................................................................................................................113
Table 48 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures .............................................................................116
Table 49 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures .....................................................................117
Table 50 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors...................................................................117
Table 51 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table ...................................................................................................118
Table 52 Resetting the Transmitter............................................................................................................................120
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
ix
Tables
Table 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference....................................................................................123
Table 54 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 42 and Figure 43 ......................................................................125
Table 55 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44. ............................................................................................126
Table 56 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 45. ............................................................................................129
Table 57 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 46. ............................................................................................130
Table 58 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body ...........................131
Table 59 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 47. ............................................................................................132
Table 60 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 48. ............................................................................................133
Table 61 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 49. ............................................................................................134
Table 62 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 50. ............................................................................................136
Table 63 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 51. ............................................................................................137
Table 64 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts. ...................................................................................................139
Table A-1 Description of Smart Meter Display Indicators........................................................................................141
Table A-2 Smart Pushbutton Description..................................................................................................................142
Table A-3 Smart meter specifications. ......................................................................................................................143
Table A-4 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments..............................................................144
Table A-5 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code ......................................................................................................148
Table A-6 Selecting Engineering Units .....................................................................................................................149
Table A-7 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display..........................................................................152
Table A-8 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display............................................................................155
Table A-9 Smart meter display setup using HART communicator ...........................................................................161
Table A-10 Summary of Typical Smart Meter Indications. ......................................................................................163
Table A-11 Smart Meter Error Codes and Descriptions............................................................................................164
Table C-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems ...................................................................................176
Table C-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values .................................................................................177
Table D-1 Temperature Identification Numbers (NEC/CEC) ...................................................................................181
Table D-2 FM Entity Parameters...............................................................................................................................183
Table D-3 Temperature Identification Numbers (IEC)..............................................................................................185
Table D-4 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification ..................................188
Table 1 Additions to the User Manual.......................................................................................................................200
Table 2 Torque Table - Process Head Bolts/Nuts.....................................................................................................201
Table 3 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 1 ................................................................................................202
Table 4 Process Head Assembly Kits .......................................................................................................................204
Table 5 Pressure Specification and Ratings Summary Comparisons .......................................................................205
x
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
Figures
Figures
Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.........................................................................................2
Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation. ....................................................3
Figure 3 Typical Communication Interface...................................................................................................................7
Figure 4 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter Order Components. ..........................................................................................8
Figure 5 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option. .......................................................................................................9
Figure 6 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation.........................................................................14
Figure 7 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations........................................................................18
Figure 8 Leveling Transmitters ...................................................................................................................................21
Figure 9 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation .........................................................................................22
Figure 10 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation .........................................................................................24
Figure 11 Typical Flange and Pipe Mounted Installations ..........................................................................................25
Figure 12 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation. .........................................................................27
Figure 13 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement. .............................................................28
Figure 14 Typical Piping Arrangement for ½” NPT Process Connection ...................................................................29
Figure 15 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters. ...............................................................................................33
Figure 16 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Blocks ........................................................................................................34
Figure 17 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection..............................................................................................36
Figure 18 Typical Communicator Connections...........................................................................................................40
Figure 19 Write Protection and Failsafe Direction Jumper Location ..........................................................................43
Figure 20 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit...............................................................................................44
Figure 21 Summary of Configuration Process.............................................................................................................46
Figure 22 Communicator and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories ...................................................................................47
Figure 23 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary............................................................................................................50
Figure 24 HART Communicator Menu Summary ......................................................................................................51
Figure 25 HART Communicator Keyboard ................................................................................................................52
Figure 26 Square Root Dropout Point .........................................................................................................................61
Figure 27 Typical Communicator and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode..................68
Figure 28 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter .......................................69
Figure 29 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter..................................71
Figure 30 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank73
Figure 31 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized
Tank. 75
Figure 32 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter..................................78
Figure 33 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type Transmitter...........................79
Figure 34 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter..................................81
Figure 35 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter with Remote
Seals. 83
Figure 36 Location of Failsafe and Write Protect Jumpers on PWA...........................................................................90
Figure 37 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function......................................................................................93
Figure 38 Disassembly of DP Transmitter Process Heads from Meter Body............................................................101
Figure 39 Typical Range Calibration Hookup...........................................................................................................112
Figure 40 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. .................................................................................122
Figure 41 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. .................................................................................123
Figure 42 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End...................................................................124
Figure 43 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End ......................................................................124
Figure 44 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 & STD930 C, D, G, H, K, and L and
STD974..............................................................................................................................................................125
Figure 45 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 & STD930 A, B, E, F, and J .........................................128
Figure 46 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body ......................................................130
Figure 47 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies. ..................................................................................................132
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
xi
Figures
Figure 48 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP/LAP Meter Body. ...................................................................................133
Figure 49 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body.........................................................................................................134
Figure 50 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body. .........................................................................135
Figure 51 High Temperature Meter Body. ................................................................................................................137
Figure A-1 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit...........................................................................................141
Figure A-2 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments................................147
Figure C-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid. ..................170
Figure C-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid.....................170
Figure C-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow..............................................................................................................171
Figure C-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals.........................172
Figure C-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal.................................172
Figure C-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and
Control...............................................................................................................................................................173
Figure C-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control.174
Figure C-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating. .......175
Figure C-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating. .............176
Figure 1 ST 3000 Model STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170, STD924, STD930
(Rev S or
greater)...............................................................................................................................................................201
xii
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Before You Begin, Please Note
Transmitter Terminal Blocks
Depending on your transmitter options, the transmitter may be equipped with either a 3-screw or 5-screw
terminal block inside the electronics housing. This may affect how to connect the loop wiring and meter
wiring to the transmitter. See Table 14 in Section 4 for the terminal block connections for each type
terminal. Section 13 provides additional wiring diagrams showing alternate wiring methods.
+
-
METER
+
TEST
L+
-
+
-
+
-
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
- SIGNAL +
Electronics
Housing
Terminal
Block
TEST
Electronics
Housing
Terminal
Block
Internal
Ground
Terminal
Internal
Ground
Terminal
3-Screw Terminal Block
6/05
5-Screw Terminal Block
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
xiii
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Overview
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only
Overview
About this section
This section is intended for users who have never worked with our ST 3000 Smart Transmitter with
HART communications. It provides some general information to acquaint you with the ST 3000
transmitter and the HART communications interface.
Section contents
This section includes these topics:
6/05
•
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters – Brief description of the ST 3000 transmitter form, functions and
identification.
•
HART Communicator – Brief description of the communication interface used with the ST 3000
HART transmitter.
•
Transmitter order – Describes the components shipped with a transmitter order.
•
Local Smart Meter Option – Describes the smart meter options available with the transmitter.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
1
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
About the transmitter
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter comes in a variety of models for measurement applications involving one
of these basic types of pressure:
•
Differential Pressure
•
Gauge Pressure
•
Absolute Pressure
The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits an output signal proportional to the measured
variable over a 4 to 20 milliampere, two-wire loop. Its major components are an electronics housing and a
meter body as shown in Figure 1 for a typical differential pressure model transmitter.
Electronics
Housing
Meter Body
Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.
2
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
Functional block diagram
Besides the process variable (PV) output, the transmitter also provides its meter body temperature as a
secondary variable (SV) which is only available as a read-only parameter through the communicator
interface. See Figure 2.
Factory
Characterization
Data
Electronics Housing
Meter Body
PROM
Temperature
Sensor
Static Pressure
Sensor
Multiplexer
DP or PP
Sensor
A/D
Microprocessor
D/A
Digital I/O
Modular Electronics
Proportional 4 to
20 mA PV output.
(Digital signal
imposed during
HART interface
communications)
Terminal Block
Pressure
Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
3
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
Series and model number data
Honeywell’s line of ST 3000 Smart Transmitters includes these two series designations:
• Series 100
• Series 900
se
m
bl
y
Table II
0 0 0 0 0
Table III
S B, 1 C
or
y
Fa
ct
io
ns
pt
O
an
ge
Fl
et
er
M
Table I
E 1 H
As
dy
Bo
pe
Ty
si
c
Ba
Key Number
S T D 1 2 0
Id
en
ti f
ica
ti o
n
Each series includes several models to meet various process pressure measurement and interface
requirements. Each transmitter comes with a nameplate located on the top of the electronics housing that
lists its given “model number”. The model number format consists of a Key Number with several Table
selections as shown below.
Table IV
XXXX
You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you have from the third and fourth digits
in the key number. The letter in the third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types:
A = Absolute Pressure
D = Differential Pressure
F = Flange Mounted
G = Gauge Pressure
R = Remote Seals
The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter Series. Thus, a “1” means the
transmitter is a Series 100 and a “9” is a Series 900.
For a complete breakdown of the Table selections in your model number, please refer to the appropriate
Specification and Model Selection Guide that is provided as a separate document.
ATTENTION
Be aware that previous vintages of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series 100,
Series 100e, Series 600, and Series 900 have been supplied at various times since the ST
3000 was introduced in 1983. While all these transmitters are functionally alike, there are
differences in housing and electronics design.
This manual only applies for Series 100, Release 300 and Series 900, Release 300
transmitters furnished with the HART communications option (option HC). Release 300
transmitters can be identified by the “R300” designation on the nameplate.
4
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
ST 3000 transmitter family
Table 1 illustrates the various ST 3000 Release 300 pressure transmitters that are presently available.
Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family
Transmitter Type
Series 100 Model
Series 900 Model
Differential
Pressure
STD1xx
STD9xx
Differential Pressure
with Flange on One
Side
STF1xx
STF9xx
Dual-Head Gauge
Pressure
In-Line Gauge
Pressure and
Absolute
6/05
Not Available
STG9xx
STG1xL
STG9xL
STA1xL
STA9xL
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
5
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
Transmitter Type
Series 100 Model
Gauge and Absolute
Pressure
Series 900 Model
STG1xx
STG9xx
STA1xx
STA9xx
STF1xx
STF9xx
Flange-Mount
Liquid Level
Differential Pressure
with Remote
Diaphragm Seals
Flush Mount
High Temperature
STR1xx
STR9xx
Not Available
STG93P
STG14T
Not Available
STF14T
6
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - HART Communicator
HART Communicator
Transmitter adjustments
Except for optional local zero and span adjustments, the ST 3000 has no physical adjustments. You need a
HART communicator to make any adjustments in a ST 3000 with the HART communications option.
Transmitter operator interface
The HART communicator (Model 275) is connected to the loop wiring of the ST 3000 transmitter for direct
communication with the transmitter. The hand-held communicator “talks” with a transmitter through serial
digital signals over the 4 to 20 milliampere line used to power the transmitter. A request/response format is
the basis for the communication operation. The transmitter’s microprocessor receives a communication
signal from the communicator, identifies the request, and sends a response message.
Figure 3 shows a simplified view of the communication interface provided by the communicator.
Request
Power
Supply and
Receiver
4 to 20 mA line
Response
ST 3000
HART
Communicator
Figure 3 Typical Communication Interface
Communicator Purpose
The communicator allows you to adjust transmitter values, or diagnose potential problems from a remote
location such as the control room. You use the communicator to:
•
Configure: Define and enter the transmitter’s operating parameters.
•
Monitor: Read the input pressure to the transmitter in engineering units and the transmitter’s output in
milliamperes or percent.
•
Display: Retrieve and display data from the transmitter or the communicator’s memory.
•
Check current output: Use the transmitter to supply the output current desired for verifying analog
loop operation, troubleshooting, or calibrating other components in the analog loop.
•
Troubleshoot: Check status of transmitter operation and display diagnostic messages to identify
transmitter, communication, or operator error problems.
ATTENTION
Throughout this manual, procedures are given on how to use the HART communicator to
configure, operate and troubleshoot the ST 3000 transmitter. Keystrokes and screen displays
for the HART communicator are referenced in these procedures. However, additional
information on communicator operation is found in the product manual supplied with the
communicator.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
7
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Transmitter Order
Transmitter Order
Order components
Figure 4 shows the components that would be shipped and received for a typical ST 3000 transmitter order.
Ordered
Š ST 3000 Series 100 HART differential pressure transmitter
with optional mounting bracket
Shipped
Received
ST 3000
User's
Manual
Mounting Bracket (Optional)
Figure 4 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter Order Components.
About documentation
–
8
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User’s Manual, 34-ST-25-17: One copy is shipped with every
order. This document provides detailed information for installing, wiring, configuring, starting up, operating,
maintaining, and servicing the ST 3000 transmitter. This is the main reference manual for the ST 3000
transmitter.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Local Smart Meter Option
Local Smart Meter Option
Smart meter assembly
A Local Smart Meter and/or Zero and Span Adjust option comes as a separate assembly and is integrally
mounted on the transmitter’s Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA) mounting bracket within the electronics
housing. The meter option assembly includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the
transmitter’s PWA. A meter end-cap that includes a window is supplied on the electronics side of the
transmitter’s housing so you can view the meter display with the end-cap installed. See Figure 5.
Electronics
Housing
Local Smart
Meter Option
Figure 5 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
9
1— Introduction - First Time Users Only - Local Smart Meter Option
Option availability
Depending upon your transmitter model, it can be equipped with one of the available integral local smart
meter and/or zero and span adjust options as shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Local Smart Meter Options
Option Description
Available with Transmitter Series
100
900
Yes
Yes
Yes *
Yes
Yes *
Yes
Local Smart Meter only
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span Adjustments
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
UNITS
SET
ZERO
LOWER
VALUE
Local Zero and Span Adjustments only
SPAN
ZERO
* Except draft range, Model STD110.
10
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
2— Quick Start Reference - Overview
2— Quick Start Reference
Overview
About this section
This section provides a list of typical start-up tasks and tells you where you can find detailed information
about performing the task.
This section assumes that the ST 3000 transmitter has been installed and wired correctly, and is ready to be
put into operation. It also assumes that you are somewhat familiar with using the HART communicator and
that the transmitter has been configured correctly for your application. If the transmitter has not been
installed and wired, you are not familiar with HART communicator operation, and/or you do not know if
the transmitter is configured correctly, please read the other sections of this manual before starting up your
transmitter.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
11
2— Quick Start Reference - Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly
Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly
Quick start-up tasks
Table 3 lists common start-up tasks for an ST 3000 transmitter using a HART communicator and gives an
appropriate section in this manual to reference for more information about how to do the task. The start-up
tasks are listed in the order they are commonly completed.
Table 3 Start-up Tasks Reference
Task
12
Description
Reference Section and Topic
1
Put analog loop into manual mode
Appropriate vendor documentation for
controller or recorder used as a
receiver in analog loop with
ST 3000 transmitter.
2
Connect HART communicator to
transmitter and establish
communications.
5 – Getting Started
Establishing Communications
3
Check/set output form (Linear/Square
Root).
6 – Configuration
Pressure Transfer Function
4
Check/set damping time.
6 – Configuration
PV damping
5
Check/set Lower Range Value and
Upper Range Value.
6 – Configuration
Range Values
(See Appendix A for setting range
values using local zero and span
adjustments)
6
Run optional output check for analog
loop
7 – Start Up
Running Analog Output
7
Check zero input and set, if required.
7 – Start Up
See Steps 6 and 7 in Table 29.
8
Check transmitter status
8 – Operation
Accessing Operation Data
9
Setup local Smart Meter, if applicable.
10
Write data in scratch pad memory, if
desired.
6 – Configuration
Device Information
11
Store all changes in the transmitter's
nonvolatile memory.
6 – Configuration
Configuration Overview
Appendix A – Smart meter reference
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
3— Preinstallation Considerations - Overview
3— Preinstallation Considerations
Overview
About this section
This section contains information that you should take into consideration before you install a new
transmitter. The topics in this section include:
•
CE Conformity notice and special conditions for European installations.
•
Environmental and operating conditions, which cover operating temperature limits and overpressure
ratings for safe transmitter operation.
•
HART communicator interface conditions.
•
Operating conditions for transmitters equipped with the smart meter option.
Of course, if you are replacing an existing ST 3000 transmitter you may skip this section.
CE Conformity (Europe) Notice
About conformity and special conditions
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive.
Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and the following special conditions,
may invalidate this product’s conformity with the EMC Directive.
•
You must use shielded, twisted-pair cable such as Belden 9318 for all signal/power wiring.
•
You must connect the shield to ground at the power supply side of the wiring only and leave it
insulated at the transmitter side.
ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio
and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters (98 feet) to the
antenna(e). In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the
user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic
emissions of this equipment.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
13
3— Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter
Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter
Evaluate conditions
The ST 3000 transmitter is designed to operate in common indoor industrial environments as well as
outdoors. To assure optimum performance, evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to
published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices for electronic pressure transmitters.
• Environmental Conditions
• Vibration Sources
– Ambient Temperature
– Relative Humidity
– Pumps
– Motorized Valves
– Valve Cavitation
• Potential Noise Sources
– Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
– Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
• Process Characteristics
– Temperature
– Maximum Pressure Rating
Figure 6 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before installing a transmitter.
Lightning
(EMI)
Ambient
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Large Fan Motors
(EMI)
Transceivers
(RFI)
Pump
(vibration)
Meter Body
Temperature
21003
Figure 6 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation
Temperature limits
Table 4 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of transmitters with silicone fill fluids.
See transmitter specifications for temperature limits of ST 3000 transmitters with alternative fill fluids.
14
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
3— Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter
Table 4 Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluid DC200)
Transmitter Type and Model
Draft Range
Ambient Temperature
STD110
Process Interface Temperature
°C
°F
°C
°F
-40 to 70
-40 to 158
-40 to 70
-40 to 158
Differential Pressure
STD125
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
STD120, STD130, STD170
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
STD904, STD924, STD930,
STD974
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
STG140, STG170, STG180
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
STG14L, STG17L, STG18L
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 110
-40 to 230
STG14T
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 150 †
-40 to 302 †
Gauge Pressure
STG93P
-15 to 65
5 to 149
-15 to 95 ††
5 to 203 ††
STG944, STG974
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
STG90L, STG94L, STG97L,
STG98L
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 110
-40 to 230
Absolute Pressure
STA122/12L
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
STA140/14L
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
See Specification Sheet
STA922/92L
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
STA940/94L
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 80
-40 to 176
Flange Mounted
STF128, STF132, STF924, STF932
-40 to 93
-40 to 200
-40 to 175
-40 to 350
Pseudo-Flanged Head
STF12F, STF13F, STF92F, STF93F
-40 to 93
-40 to 200
-40 to 93
-40 to 200
STF14F
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
Gauge Pressure Flange Mount
STF14T
-40 to 93
-40 to 200
-40 to 150 †
-40 to 302 †
-40 to 80
-40 to 176
See Specification Sheet
Remote Diaphragm Seals
STR12D, STR13D, STR14G,
STR17G, STR14A
STR93D, STR94G
See Specification Sheet
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
See Specification Sheet
See Specification Sheet
†
Process temperatures above 125 °C (257 °F) require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as
follows:
Process Temperature
Ambient Temperature Limit
150 °C (302 °F)
50 °C (122 °F)
140 °C (284 °F)
60 °C (140 °F)
125 °C (257 °F)
85 °C (185 °F)
†† Process temperatures above 65 °C (149 °F) require a 1:1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature.
Note:
For transmitters with local meter option see Appendix A
Note: Transmitters with other fill fluids (CTFE, Neobee, Etc.) have different Operating Temperature Limits. For
more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter
nameplate
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
15
3— Preinstallation Considerations - Considerations for HART communicator
Pressure ratings
Table 5 lists maximum working pressure for a given transmitter Upper Range Limit (URL). The maximum
allowable working pressure (MAWP) is the pressure used for the approval body safety calculations
Table 5 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings
Transmitter Type
Upper Range Limit (URL)
MAWP
Draft Range
10 inches H2O (25 mbar)
50 psi (3.5 bar)
Differential Pressure
400 inches H2O (1 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
300 psi (21 bar)
300 psi (21 bar)
500 psi (35 bar)
500 psi (35 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
6000 psi (415 bar)
6000 psi (415 bar)
10000 psi (690 bar)
10000 psi (690 bar)
400 inches H2O (1 bar)
Per selected flange and material
(ANSI/ASME 150#, 300#, DN PN40)
Gauge Pressure
Flange Mount
100 psi (7 bar)
Remote Seal
Absolute Pressure
400 inches H2O (1 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
Lesser MAWP of either Remote Seal
selected or transmitter pressure
rating
780 mmHg Absolute
(1 bar)
500 psia (35 bar)
780 mmHg Absolute
(1 bar)
500 psia (35 bar)
Note: Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) may vary with materials of construction and process
temperature. For more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection
Guide or transmitter nameplate
Note: To convert bar values to kilopascals (kPa), multiply by 100.
For example, 3.5 bar equals 350 kPa.
Considerations for HART communicator
Guidelines
When using the communicator to communicate with the transmitter:
• Be sure the power supply voltage does not exceed 42 Vdc (30 Vdc for intrinsically safe loops).
• Be sure there is at least 250 ohms of resistance between the communicator and the power supply for
proper communication.
• Refer to communicator product manual for such information as operating limits.
Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option
If your transmitter is to be installed and operated with one of the integral smart meter options, please note
the Smart meter specifications and operating conditions for the meter located in Appendix A of this
manual.
16
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Overview
4— Installation
Overview
About this section
This section provides information about installing the ST 3000 transmitter. The topics in this section
include:
•
Mounting the ST 3000 transmitter - various mounting methods are described and can be used
depending upon the transmitter type.
•
Piping the transmitter to the process – connecting the transmitter meter body to the process piping or
tank connection.
•
Wiring the transmitter – connecting the loop wiring and ground conductors to the transmitter, and
information is given on connecting local and remote indicating meters to the transmitter.
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Summary
You can mount all transmitter models (except flush mount models and those with integral flanges) to a
2-inch (50 millimeter) vertical or horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket, or a
bracket of your own. Flush mount models are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank by a 1” weld
nipple. Those models with integral flanges are supported by the flange connection.
Figure 7 shows typical bracket mounted and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.
Dimensions
Detailed dimension drawings for given transmitter series and types are listed in Section 13 in this manual
for reference. Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown in the specification sheets for the
given transmitter models.
The procedures following assume that the mounting dimensions have already been taken into account and
the mounting area can accommodate the transmitter.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
17
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Angle
Mounting
Bracket
Flat
Mounting
Bracket
Horizontal Pipe
Tank
Wall
Flange
Connection
Transmitter
Flange
Figure 7 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations
Bracket mounting
Table 6 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a bracket.
Table 6 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket
Step
1
Action
If you are using an…
Optional mounting bracket, then go to Step 2.
Existing mounting bracket, then go to Step 3.
18
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Step
Action
2
Position bracket on 2-inch (50.8 mm) horizontal or vertical pipe, and install “U” bolt around pipe
and through holes in bracket. Secure with nuts and lockwashers provided.
Example - Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical pipe.
Nuts and
Lockwashers
Nuts and
Lockwashers
Mounting
Bracket
U-Bolt
Mounting
Bracket
Horizontal Pipe
Vertical Pipe
U-Bolt
3
Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket and secure with bolts and
washers provided.
If transmitter is …
− DP type with double-ended process heads and/or remote seals, then use alternate
mounting holes in end of heads
− GP or AP with single-ended head, then use mounting holes in side of meter body.
− In-line GP or AP, then use smaller “U” bolt provided to attach meter body to bracket. See
figure below.
− Dual-head GP or AP, then use mounting holes in end of process head.
Inline Models
Meter Body
Smaller
“U” bolt
Use bracket for
hexagonal meter body
Note: If the meter body is hexagonal, you must use the additional bracket supplied. If meter
body is round, discard the bracket.
4
6/05
Loosen set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn. Rotate electronics housing in
maximum of 180 degree increment in left or right direction from center to position you require
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
19
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Step
Action
and tighten set screw (13 to 15 lb-in/1.46 to 1.68 N.m).
Example - Rotating electronics housing.
Electronics
Housing
180 degrees
max.
180 degrees
max.
Set Screw
The metric socket head wrench kit supplied includes 2.5, 3, and 4mm size wrenches. You will
need the 4mm size wrench for the outside set screw.
Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans
To minimize positional effects on pressure measurement and calibration (zero shift), take the appropriate
mounting precautions that follow for transmitters with small pressure spans.
Absolute Pressure and In-line Transmitters
For absolute pressure and inline transmitters you must ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting
it. You do this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and front-to-back. See Figure 8 for suggestions on
how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance.
Absolute pressure models
Center
Section
Process
Head
Position spirit balance on
center section of meter
body only.
20
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
In-line models
Mount transmitter vertically to assure best accuracy. Position spirit balance on pressure
connection surface of AP body.
Figure 8 Leveling Transmitters
CAUTION
The mounting position of a model STA122 or STA922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a
model STD110 Draft Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter
spans become smaller. A maximum zero shift of 2.5 mm Hg for an absolute transmitter or 1.5
in H2O for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting position which is rotated 90
degrees from vertical. A typical zero shift of 0.12 mm Hg or 0.20 in H2O can occur for a 5
degree rotation from vertical.
Differential Pressure Transmitters
For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span (Model STD110, for example), you must ensure
that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it. You do this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and
front-to-back. See Figure 8 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance. You must
also zero the transmitter by following the steps in Table 7 below.
Table 7 Zero Corrects Procedure for Transmitters with a Small Differential Pressure Span
Step
6/05
Action
1
Attach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely tighten the mounting
bolts.
2
Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure (HP) and low pressure
(LP) heads to eliminate the affects of any surrounding air currents.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
21
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Step
3
Action
Connect 24 Vdc power to the transmitter and connect a milliammeter in series in the loop
circuit to read the transmitter’s output current. See figure for typical connections.
Voltmeter
Differential Pressure
Type Transmitter
Precision
Milliammeter
+
250
ohms
+
-
Power
Supply
-
Field
Terminals
-
Receiver
+
Communicator
4
Connect a communicator and establish communications with the transmitter. Follow the steps
in Table 15, if needed.
5
While reading the transmitter’s output on the milliammeter, position the transmitter so the
output reading is at or near zero and then completely tighten the mounting bolts.
6
Follow the steps below to do an input zero correct function using the communicator. This
corrects the transmitter for any minor error that may occur after the mounting bolts are
tightened.
7
Starting from “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Zero Trim
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
You will be prompted that this procedure will affect sensor calibration. Press OK.
Press OK to initiate zero input corrects.
You will be prompted to return the loop to automatic control. Press OK
8
22
Remove the tube from between the input connections, the power, and the milliammeter and
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Step
Action
communicator.
9
Continue with the remaining installation tasks.
Flange mounting
Transmitters that are furnished with integral flange connections (models STFxxx), are bolted directly to the
process flange connection. Figure 9 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange on the high
pressure (HP) side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact with the process fluid. The low pressure (LP)
side of the transmitter is vented to atmosphere (no connection).
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s flange to the flange pipe on the wall of
the tank.
ATTENTION
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.
Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired
position. See Table 6, Step 4 for details.
It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are
suitable for the transmitter’s service condition.
To prevent degradation of performance in Flush-Mounted Flanged Transmitters, exercise care to
ensure that the internal diameter of the flange gasket does not obstruct the sensing diaphragm.
To prevent degradation of performance in Extended Mount Flanged Transmitters, ensure that
there is sufficient clearance in front of the sensing diaphragm body.
Attention: Dotted area indicates use
with closed tank with reference leg.
Maximum Level
Variable
Head H1
Reference
Leg
Minimum Level
HP Side
mounted
to tank
LP Side vented
to atmosphere
Figure 9 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
23
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Flush mounting
ST 3000 flush mount transmitters (model STG9xx) are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank using a
1 inch weld nipple. Figure 10 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe.
Follow the steps in Table 8 to install a flush mount transmitter.
Table 8 Flush Mount Transmitter Installation
Step
1
Action
Cut a hole for a 1” standard pipe in the tank or pipe where the transmitter is to be mounted
ATTENTION
On insulated tanks and pipes, remove enough insulation to accommodate the mounting
sleeve.
2
Weld the 1” mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe
3
Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and secure with the locking
bolt
4
Tighten the bolt to a torque of 8.1 to 13.5 N · m ( 6 to 10 ft-lb).
5
Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired
position. See Table 6, Step 4 for details.
1" Pipe Mount 316 SS Weld Nipple
(standard option)
Figure 10 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation
24
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
High Temperature Transmitter Mounting
You can mount the high temperature transmitter directly to the process flange connection or the process
piping. Figure 11 shows typical pipe and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s flange to the flange on the wall of the
tank or process pipe.
It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for
the transmitter’s service condition.
ATTENTION
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.
Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position.
See Table 6, step 4.
Tank
Wall
Flange
Connection
Process Pipe
Transmitter
Flange
1/2" NPT
Connection
Figure 11 Typical Flange and Pipe Mounted Installations
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
25
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Remote seal mounting
ST 3000 transmitters furnished with remote diaphragm seals (models STRxxx) can be mounted using the
optional mounting brackets. (See procedure in Table 6 in this section for bracket mounting.) Follow the
guidelines below to determine the mounting position of the remote seals for the given fill fluid and then use
the procedure in Table 9 to mount the remote seals to the process connections.
Figure 12 shows a typical installation for a remote diaphragm seal transmitter for reference.
WARNING
Mount the remote seal flanges within the limits stated below for the given fill-fluid in the
capillary tubes.
IF the fill fluid is…
THEN mount the flange…
Silicone DC 200 Oil
no greater than 22 feet (6.7 meters) below the transmitter.
Silicone DC 704 Oil
no greater than 19 feet (5.8 meters) below the transmitter.
Chlorotrifluorethylene (CTFE)
no greater than 11 feet (3.4 meters) below the transmitter.
NOTE: The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary head effect should not exceed 9 psi
(300 mm Hg) absolute.
Table 9 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter
Step
Action
1
Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of capillary tubing.
2
To measure variable head H1, mount remote seals on tank walls as follows:
• If Transmitter Model Number is…
STR93D or STR12D, then connect remote seal on high pressure (HP) side of
transmitter to either the lower flange or the upper flange.
• If Transmitter Model Number is…
STR13D, the remote seal on low pressure (LP) side of transmitter must be connected
to lower flange.
See Figure 12.
ATTENTION
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension.
3
26
It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are
suitable for the transmitter’s service condition
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
LP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D
HP Side
- Model STR13D
Maximum Level
H2
Fixed
Ref. Leg
Variable
Head H1
Minimum Level
HP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D
LP Side
- Model STR13D
Figure 12 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
27
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Piping Arrangements
The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process measurement requirements and the
transmitter model. Except for flush, flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections, process connections
are made to ¼ inch or ½ inch NPT female connections in the process head of the transmitter’s meter body.
For example, a differential pressure transmitter comes with double-ended process heads with ¼ inch NPT
connections but they can be modified to accept ½ inch NPT through optional flange adapters. Some gauge
pressure transmitters may have a ½ inch NPT connection that mounts directly to a process pipe.
The most common type of pipe used is ½ inch schedule 80 steel pipe. Many piping arrangements use a
three-valve manifold to connect the process piping to the transmitter. A manifold makes it easy to install
and remove or rezero a transmitter without interrupting the process. It also accommodates the installation
of blow-down valves to clear debris from pressure lines to the transmitter.
Figure 13 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a three-valve manifold and blow-down
lines for a differential pressure transmitter being used to measure flow.
To Downstream Tap
Blow-Down
Valve
To Upstream Tap
Blow-Down
Valve
3-Valve
Manifold
Blow-Down
Piping
Blow-Down
Piping
To Low Pressure
Side of Transmitter
To High Pressure
Side of Transmitter
To Waste
To Waste
21010
Figure 13 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement.
Another piping arrangement uses a block-off valve and a tee connector in the process piping to the
transmitter as shown in Figure 14.
28
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Tank Wall
1/2" NPT
Connection
Block-off Valve
Figure 14 Typical Piping Arrangement for ½” NPT Process Connection
Transmitter location
Table 10 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the process.
Table 10 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Processes
Process
Liquids
Suggested Location
1. Below but close to the
Explanation
1.
This minimizes the static
head effect of the
condensate.
2.
This requires a siphon to
protect the transmitter from
process steam. The siphon
retains water as a “fill fluid.”
elevation of the process
connection.
2. Level with or above the
process connection.
Gases
Above the gas line
The condensate drains away
from the transmitter
ATTENTION
• For liquid or steam, the piping should slope a minimum of 25.4 mm (1 inch) per 305 mm (1
foot). Slope the piping down towards the transmitter if the transmitter is below the process
connection so the bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid. If the transmitter
is located above the process connection, the piping should rise vertically above the
transmitter; then slope down towards the flowline with a vent valve at the high point.
• For gas measurement, use a condensate leg and drain at the low point (freeze protection
may be required here). See Appendix C for some suggested freeze protection solutions.
ATTENTION
Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes. The operating temperature
limits for the device (as outlined in Table 3) must not be exceeded. Impulse piping may be
used to reduce the temperature of the process that comes into contact with the transmitter
meter body. As a general rule there is a 56 degree C drop (100 degree F) in the temperature
of the process for every foot of 1/2" uninsulated piping.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
29
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Process connections
Table 11 describes typical process connections for a given type of transmitter.
Table 11 Process Connections
Transmitter Type
Differential Pressure
Process Connection
• Process heads with 1/4-inch NPT female connection.
• Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female connection are
optional.
• Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2- or 3-inch ANSI class
150 flange.
Gauge Pressure
• Process head with 1/2-inch NPT female connection (Series 100).
• In-line 1/2-inch NPT female connection (STGxxL).
• In-line ½-inch NPT male
• 9/16 Aminco
• DIN19213
• Process heads with 1/4-inch NPT female connection (STG9x4).
• Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female connections are
optional (STG9x4).
• 2-inch Sanitary Tri-Clamp (STGxxT).
• Flush mount in 1” weld sleeve, with O-ring and locking bolt (STGxxP).
Absolute Pressure
Process head with 1/2-inch NPT female connection. (STAx22, x40, STAx2L,
STA4xL)
• In-line ½-inch NPT male
• 9/16 Aminco
• DIN19213
Flange Mounted
Liquid Level
Small flange 1/2-inch, 1-, 1 ½ - and 2-inch (STFxxT)
2, 3- or 4-inch flange with flush or 2-, 4- or 6-inch extended diaphragm (See
Table 12) on high pressure side.*
• DN 50, 80, or 100 PN 40 flange with flush or 2, 4 or 6 inch extended
diaphragm (See Table 12) on High Pressure Side*.
Remote Diaphragm
Seals
See model selection guide for description of available flanged, threaded,
chemical tee, saddle, and sanitary process connections.
* Reference side has standard differential pressure process head.
30
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Flange descriptions
Table 12 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted liquid level transmitters.
Table 12 Flange Description
Diaphragm Type
Flush or Extended
Diaphragm
Description
2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 120.7 mm
(4.75 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 150 mm (5.91 in).
2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 127 mm
(5.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
3-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 152.4 mm
(6.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7.48 in).
3-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 168.3
mm (6.62 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 210 mm (8.27 in).
4-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 190.5
mm (7.50 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 230 mm (9.05 in).
4-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 255 mm
(10.04 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 50 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 4 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 125
mm (4.92 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
DN 80 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 160
mm (6.30 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 100 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22 mm (0.87 in) diameter on 190
mm (7.48 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 235 mm (9.25 in).
Pseudo Flange Head
2-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 15.9 mm (5/8 in) diameter on
120.6 mm (4-3/4 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152.4 mm (6 in).
3-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on
152 mm (6 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7-1/2 in).
Flush Mount
Gauge STG93P
25.4 mm (1-inch) pipe mount. (316L SS standard option.)
General piping guidelines
6/05
•
When measuring fluids containing suspended solids, install permanent valves at regular intervals to
blow-down piping.
•
Blow-down all lines on new installations with compressed air or steam and flush them with process
fluids (where possible) before connecting these lines to the transmitter’s meter body.
•
Be sure all the valves in the blow-down lines are closed tight after the initial blow-down procedure
and each maintenance procedure after that.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
31
4— Installation - Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Installing flange adapter
Table 13 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process head.
ATTENTION
Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before you insert it into the adapter
may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove while you align the adapter to the process head.
To deform the gasket, submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its
recessed mounting groove in the adapter.
Table 13 Installing Flange Adapter
Step
Action
1
Insert filter screen (if supplied) into inlet cavity of process head.
2
Carefully seat Teflon (white) gasket into adapter groove.
3
Thread adapter onto 1/2-inch process pipe and align mounting holes in adapter with holes in
end of process head as required.
4
Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7/16-20 hex-head bolts.
Example - Installing adapter on process head.
Process
Head
Filter Screen
Teflon Gasket
Flange Adapter
7/16 x 20 Bolts
21011
ATTENTION
Apply an anti-seize compound on the stainless steel bolts prior to threading them into the
process head.
5
32
Evenly torque flange adapter bolts to a torque of 27,1 Nm +/- 1,4 Nm (20 ft lbs +/- 1.0 ft lbs)
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Summary
The transmitter is designed to operate in a two-wire power/current loop with loop resistance and power
supply voltage within the operating range shown in Figure 15. When option LP (lightning protection)
and/or remote smart meter are selected, the voltage drop for these options must be added to the basic
transmitter voltage of 10.8 V to determine VXMTR and RLOOP MAX. Additional consideration is required
when selecting intrinsic safety barriers to insure that the barriers will supply VXMTR MIN including the
required 250 ohms (typically within the barriers) for digital communications.
Transmitter Parameters:
RLOOP MAX = The maximum loop resistance (barriers plus wiring) that will allow proper transmitter
operation.
Therefore,
RLOOP MAX =
(VSUPPLY MIN – VXMTR MIN) ÷ 21.8 mA
Where,
VXMTR MIN =
10.8 V + VLP + VSM
VLP =
1.1 V, lightning protection option, LP
VSM = 2.3 V, remote smart meter
(Please note that VSM should only be considered if a remote smart meter
will be connected to the transmitter.)
1440
1200
Loop
Resistance
(ohms)
= Operating
Area
NOTE: A minimum of
250 0hms of loop
resistance is
necessary to support
communications. Loop
resistance equals
barrier resistance plus
wire resistance plus
receiver resistance.
Also 45 volt operation
is permitted if not an
intrinsically safe
installation.
800
650
450
250
0
10.8
16.28 20.63 25
28.3
37.0
42.4
Operating Voltage (Vdc)
21012
Figure 15 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters.
The positive and negative loop wires are connected to the positive (+) and negative (–) SIGNAL terminals
on the terminal block in the transmitter’s electronics housing as shown in Figure 16.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
33
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
5-Screw Terminal Block
Lightning Protection Option (option LP)
SIGNAL
- SIGNAL +
Electronics
Housing
Terminal
Block
+
-
METER
+
TEST
L+
-
+
-
+
-
SIGNAL
Electronics
Housing
Terminal
Block
TEST
3-Screw Terminal Block
Internal
Ground
Terminal
Internal
Ground
Terminal
Figure 16 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Blocks
Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the transmitter to earth ground. A ground
terminal can be optionally added to the outside of the electronics housing. While it is not necessary to
ground the transmitter for proper operation, we suggest that you do so to minimize the possible effects of
“noise” on the output signal and provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge
damage. Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body certification. Refer to
Section 3, CE Conformity (Europe) Notice for special conditions.
Optional lightning protection (option LP) can be ordered for transmitters that will be installed in areas
highly susceptible to lightning strikes. Figure 17 shows the 5-screw terminal block used when the lightning
protection option is ordered.
Barriers can be installed per manufacturer’s instructions for transmitters to be used in intrinsically safe
applications.
Wiring connections
The procedure in Table 14 shows the steps for connecting loop power to the transmitter. For loop wiring
and external wiring diagrams, refer to the installation drawings presented in Section 13. Detailed drawings
are provided for transmitter installation in non-intrinsically safe areas and for intrinsically safe loops in
hazardous area locations.
ATTENTION
All wiring must comply with local codes, regulations, and ordinances.
If you will be using the transmitter in a hazardous area, be sure to review the hazardous
location reference data included in Appendix D of this manual before wiring and operating the
transmitter.
34
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Table 14 Wiring the Transmitter
Step
Action
1
Loosen end-cap lock using a 1.5 mm allen wrench and remove end-cap cover from terminal
block end of electronics housing.
2
Feed loop power leads through one of conduit entrances on either side of electronics housing.
Plug whichever entrance you do not use.
The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG wire.
Loop
Power
4
+
-
METER
+
-
+
-
L
-+
-
+
-
+
-
TEST
Loop
Power
SIGNAL
5-screw terminal (option LP)
- SIGNAL +
3-screw terminal block
SIGNAL
Observing polarity, connect positive loop power lead to SIGNAL + terminal and negative loop
power lead to SIGNAL – terminal. See figures.
+
TEST
3
Replace end-cap, and tighten end-cap lock.
Approval body requirements
If your transmitter was ordered with Table III option 3N for self-declared approval per 94/9/EC (ATEX4),
you must use a power supply that includes a voltage limiting device that will keep the voltage to the
transmitter from exceeding 42 Vdc. You can achieve this by using a battery as the supply or one of these
voltage limiting means.
• Double wound mains transformer per BS 3535 or equivalent.
• An adequately rated zener diode whose voltage is not significantly higher than the rated voltage.
• An adequately rated semiconductor voltage regulator.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
35
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Lightning protection
When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection (option LP), you must connect a wire
from the transmitter to ground as shown in Figure 17 to make the protection effective. We recommend that
you use a size 8 AWG (American Wire Gage) or (8.37mm2) bare or green covered wire.
Electronics
Housing
Connect to
Earth Ground
Figure 17 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection.
Conduit seal
Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group A Hazardous (Classified) Location
in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the US National Electrical Code (NEC), require a “LISTED”
explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit, within 18 inches of the transmitter. Crouse-Hinds® type
EYS/EYD or EYSX/EYDX are examples of “LISTED” explosionproof seals that meets this requirement.
Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group B, C or D Hazardous (Classified)
Locations do not require an explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit.
ATTENTION
Installation should conform to all national and local electrical code requirements.
WARNING
When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location, keep covers tight while
the transmitter is energized. Disconnect power to the transmitter in the non-hazardous area
prior to removing end caps for service.
When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous Location, disconnect power to the
transmitter in the non-hazardous area, or determine that the location is non-hazardous prior to
disconnecting or connecting the transmitter wires.
36
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Output meter options
The ST 3000 transmitter can be equipped with any of these three optional output indicating meters that
provide a 0 to 100% indication of the transmitter’s output.
Meter type
Wiring Connections to Transmitter
Integral Smart Meter with local zero and span
adjustments
Integral smart meter connections — The new
integral smart meter (8-wires) is connected
directly to the transmitter’s PWA and is mounted
to the electronics module assembly inside the
electronics housing. The meter display is viewed
through a window in the transmitter’s end cap.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
SPAN
00
ZERO
-
%
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
The new integral smart meter is designed for the
ST 3000 Release 300 transmitter and provides
functionality not available with other smart meter
designs.
See Appendix A for other options of this meter
and detailed information about smart meter set up
and operation.
Meter Output indication –
• 17-segment bargraph and LCD digital readout.
• Meter provides indication of transmitter’s PV
output in percent of span or in actual
engineering units. The meter also can display
custom units.
• Transmitter status also is displayed.
ATTENTION
Only one smart meter should be installed integrally to the transmitter.
Meter type
Wiring Connections to Transmitter
Analog meter
10
8
6
80
10
0
0
20
40 % 60
10
2
4
Analog meter connections — You can connect
the analog meter (2-wires) integrally to Release
300 transmitter’s terminal block inside the
electronics housing. However, there are alternate
wiring methods for connecting an analog meter
remotely with the loop wiring. Section 13 in this
manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for
connecting an analog meter to Release 300
transmitters.
Meter Output indication –
• Traditional pointer and scale.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
37
4— Installation - Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
The third output meter option is a meter display that can be mounted remotely in a separate housing.
Meter type
SM 3000 smart meter connections — The smart
meter (3-wires) can be connected remotely to a
Release 300 transmitter. Section 13 in this
manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for
connecting this smart meter to Release 300
transmitters.
SM 3000 Smart meter
0
Wiring Connections to Transmitter
%
100
Meter Output indication –
• 17-segment bargraph and digital readout to
show PV out in % of span.
ATTENTION
Be aware that the SM 3000 remote meter only shows PV output in % of span and does not
display transmitter output in custom or flow units like the new smart meter. Therefore, if you
use an SM 3000 remote meter in conjunction with a new smart meter that is configured to
display readings in custom or flow units, the indications of the two meters will be displayed in
different units.
38
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
5— Getting Started - Overview
5— Getting Started
Overview
About this section
This section tells you how to establish communications with the ST 3000 and make initial checks of the
transmitter’s settings and configuration using a HART hand-held communicator. This section includes
these topics:
•
Verifying that the HART communicator contains the proper software version for communicating the
ST 3000 transmitter.
•
Making proper connections of the HART communicator to the ST 3000 transmitter.
•
Begin communications between the transmitter and the communicator.
•
Make initial checks to the transmitter, such as checking factory set configuration, verify write protect
option and failsafe direction, and change if necessary.
Establishing Communications
Software compatibility
You need to make sure your HART communicator contains software that is compatible with the ST 3000
HART transmitter.
To check software revision contained in the communicator:
1. Turn on the communicator and access the “Offline” menu.
2. Press “4” to select the Utility menu.
3. Press “5” to select Simulation mode.
4. The Manufacturer menu appears. Select “Honeywell”.
5. Select Model “ST3000”.
6. View the software revisions available for the selected model.
The software versions that are compatible with the ST 3000 HART Release 300 Smart Transmitter are:
Dev v2 (Device version 2)
DD v1 (Device Description version 1)
Upgrading HART communicator software
The memory module in the HART communicator is programmed with device descriptions for specific
HART-compatible devices. These device descriptions allow the communicator to recognize and “talk to”
the compatible devices. If you find that your communicator does not contain the necessary application
software and device descriptions, contact your Honeywell sales representative about upgrading your
communicator. See also the product manual that was supplied with your communicator for further
information.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
39
5— Getting Started - Establishing Communications
Connecting the communicator
You connect the hand-held communicator directly to signal terminals on the transmitter’s terminal block or
at any convenient location in the 4 to 20 milliampere loop wiring. (Polarity of the communicator
connection does not matter.)
WARNING
When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not explosionproof.
Figure 18 shows typical communicator connections across loop wiring to a ST 3000 transmitter.
ST 3000
+
- SIGNAL +
Power
Supply -
+
Receiver
250 ohm
+
TEST
-
Field
Terminals
Note: Polarity of the Communicator
connection does not matter.
Communicator
Figure 18 Typical Communicator Connections
40
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
5— Getting Started - Establishing Communications
Starting communications
Once you connect the communicator to the transmitter, you are ready to start communicating with the
transmitter. The procedure in Table 15 outlines the steps for starting communications with an ST 3000
transmitter without an assigned tag number.
Table 15 Starting Communications with Transmitter
Step
Action
1
Turn on communicator. The communicator runs a self-test check then determines if it is
connected to a transmitter.
2
If you receive a communication error message (No Device Found), check the following:
• Loop resistance: Is there a minimum of 250 ohms resistance between the communicator
and the power supply?
• Power supply: Is power applied? Is there greater than 11 volts at the transmitter? Are you
within the operating area shown in Figure 15?
Correct any problems, then try communicating again.
If the message, or any other error message, appears again, refer to Section 11 –
Troubleshooting for probable cause.
3
If the transmitter is reporting any status messages, which will be displayed at this time, refer to
Section 11 – Troubleshooting for more information.
When the “Online” display—similar to the one below—appears, you have established
communications with the transmitter.
ST3000: PT 3011
Online
1
2
3
4
5
Device setup
PV
PV AO
PV LRV
PV URV
–0.00745 inH2O
11.989 mA
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
Note: Some values for PV, PV LRV and PV URV may not be displayed in the Online display,
(due to the limitations of the communicator display). To view these values you must use
the down arrow key to select the value and then press the right arrow key to display the
value in detail.
ATTENTION
The flashing heart icon in the upper right corner indicates the communicator and transmitter
are “talking.”
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
41
5— Getting Started - Making Initial Checks
Making Initial Checks
Checking configuration data
Before doing anything else, it is a good idea to review the transmitter’s factory-set configuration
parameters. Table 16 outlines the steps.
Table 16 Reviewing Factory-Set Configuration Parameters
Step
Action
1
From the “Online” menu, enter “Device setup” by pressing the right arrow (⇒) key on the
communicator keypad.
2
Press the down arrow (⇓) key to scroll down to menu-item “5 Review”. When highlighted press
the right arrow (⇒) key to enter review function. A display similar to the one shown below
appears.
ST3000:PT 3011
Review
Manufacturer
Honeywell
HELP
3
PREV
NEXT
EXIT
Press PREV and/or NEXT to scroll through and view the configuration data, including:
• Manufacturer*
• PROM ID*
• Transmitter model*
• Tag name
• Transmitter Measurement type*
• Date
• PV unit
• Descriptor
• Maximum and minimum range limits
• Message
- PV URL
- PV LRL*
• Write protection**
• PV Damping
• Final assembly number
• PV output in % of range
• Device ID*
• PV transfer function (Output conformity)
• Universal revision*
• PV upper range value (URV) and lower
• Field device revision*
range value (LRV)
• Software revision*
• PV AO (analog output) in milliamperes
• Polling address
• PV AO alarm option (failsafe direction)**
• Number of request preambles*
•
SV (Secondary Variable) unit
* This information is fixed and cannot be changed by reconfiguring the transmitter.
** Alarm option and transmitter security are jumper-selectable on the electronics board.
4
42
After reviewing the transmitter data, press EXIT which takes you back to the “Device setup”
display.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
5— Getting Started - Making Initial Checks
Transmitter write protection option
The ST 3000 transmitters have a transmitter security option, also known as a “write protect option,” which
is jumper-selectable. You can position the jumper, located on the transmitter’s printed wiring assembly
(PWA), to allow read and write access or read only access to the transmitter’s configuration database.
When the jumper is in the read only position, you can only read/view the transmitter’s configuration and
calibration data.
The factory-default jumper position is for read and write access. There is no need to check jumper position
unless you want to change it. If you do want to change the jumper position, refer to the procedure in
Section 8. Figure 19 below shows the location of the write protect jumper on the PWA.
Write Protect
Jumper
W
Printed Wiring
Assembly
R
Read and
Write
Read Only
W
1
Failsafe
Direction
Jumper
Figure 19 Write Protection and Failsafe Direction Jumper Location
Failure mode (Failsafe) alarm jumper
ST 3000 transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale. This means that the
transmitter’s output will be driven upscale (maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.
You can change the direction from upscale to downscale (minimum output) by cutting jumper W1 on the
transmitter’s PWA. If you do want to change the jumper position, refer to the procedure in Section 8.
Figure 19 shows the location of failure mode alarm jumper on the PWA.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
43
- Making Initial Checks
Local smart meter display indications
If your ST 3000 transmitter is equipped with the smart meter option, you can check the status of all the
indicators on the local smart meter LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter. The meter runs a brief
self-test whenever power is applied to the transmitter. All the display indicators are lit during the self-test
as shown in Figure 20. (Note that the display may revert to dashes (– – –) after the self-test until the
transmitter initializes all its functions.)
VAR
SEL.
SP AN
ZERO
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
-18. 8 . 8 0
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
KNOWN VALUE
ANALOG
K
100
%
FLOW
In H 2 O
GPH mmHg
GPM PSI A
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Figure 20 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit.
Please refer to Table A-2 in Appendix A for a description of the pushbuttons on the meter face. Appendix
A in this manual contains procedures for setting up the meter display, as well as descriptions of the meter
indicators, with examples of typical display indications and error codes. Use the communicator to check the
transmitter’s status.
44
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Overview
6— Configuration
Overview
About this section
This section introduces you to ST 3000 transmitter configuration. It identifies the parameters that make up
the transmitter’s configuration database and provides procedures for entering values/selections for the
given configuration parameters.
This section also provides an overview of the HART communicator, including data on menus and
keyboard, descriptions of display selections and symbols, and information on making changes using the
communicator.
Section contents
This section includes these topics.
6/05
•
An overview of the configuration process and how messages are exchanged between transmitter and
communicator.
•
A summary of the ST 3000 configuration parameters and how to access this data using the
communicator.
•
An overview of the communicator keyboard, displays and menu structure.
•
Procedures for configuring the ST 3000 transmitter with the communicator.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
45
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Configuration Overview
About configuration
Each ST 3000 transmitter includes a configuration database that defines its particular operating
characteristics. You can use a communicator to change selected parameters within a given transmitter’s
database to alter its operating characteristics. This process of viewing and/or changing database parameters
is called “configuration.”
Figure 21 shows a graphic summary of the configuration process.
Configuration Database
Transmitter's
Operating
Characteristics
View and/or
change
database
parameters
HART
Communicator
ST 3000
Figure 21 Summary of Configuration Process
Transmitter configuration can be accomplished both on-line— with the transmitter powered up and
connected to the communicator, or off-line— where you enter the configuration in the communicator and
then store it in memory for later downloading to the transmitter
Communicator and ST 3000 transmitter memories
As shown in Figure 22, both the communicator and the ST 3000 transmitter have working memories. They
serve as temporary storage areas for data exchanged between them during communications.
The transmitter also has a nonvolatile memory that is the permanent storage area for a backup copy of all
the data held in the working memory. Nonvolatile memory retains its data even if the transmitter loses
power.
The communicator has a second temporary storage area called the off-line memory (memory module or
data pack). It serves as a permanent storage area for a saved configuration database. The memory module
or data pack supports the communicator’s SEND function to restore a saved configuration database to a
transmitter. Figure 22 shows the working relationship between communicator and transmitter memories
during communications.
46
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Working
Memory
Working
Memory
Nonvolatile
Memory
Memory Module
or
Data Pack
(Nonvolatile)
HART
Communicator
ST 3000
Figure 22 Communicator and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories
Copying transmitter configuration into nonvolatile memory
When setting up or configuring a ST 3000, whether you are changing one value or a configuration
database, all configuration data must be copied into the transmitter’s non-volatile memory to ensure the
security of the data.
Normally, thirty seconds after a value is changed, the transmitter automatically copies it from the
transmitter’s working memory into nonvolatile memory. But, if you change a value and power is
interrupted to the transmitter before the change is copied to nonvolatile memory, you will lose the data in
the working memory and it will not be saved in nonvolatile memory.
Therefore, when data is sent (downloaded) to the transmitter, be sure power to the transmitter is not
interrupted before it can be copied to nonvolatile memory.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
47
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
What to configure
Table 17 summarizes the parameters that are included in the configuration database for a ST 3000 pressure
transmitter.
Table 17 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters
Configuration Data
Setting or Selection
Tag
(Transmitter Tag Number)
Key in a tag identification up to eight characters in length.
PV unit
(Unit of Measurement)
Select any one of the pre-programmed engineering units.
ST 3000 transmitters with inches of water ranges are factory
calibrated using pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2°F
(4°C).
Pressure readings can be displayed in any one of these preprogrammed engineering units:
inH2O
inHg
ftH2O
mmH2O
mmHg
psi
bar
mbar
g/Sq cm
kg/Sq cm
Pa
kPa
torr
atm
MPa
inH2O @ 4degC
mmH2O @ 4degC
inH2O @ 60degF
Range Values
PV LRV
(Lower Range Value)
Key in desired value through communicator keyboard or set LRV to
applied pressure.
Process input for
4 mA (0%) output
PV URV
(Upper Range Value)
Key in desired value through communicator keyboard or set URV to
applied pressure.
Process input for
20 mA (100%) output
Local meter
Setup parameters for integral smart meter display.
Installed
Units
Upper
Lower
(Read only – detects if meter is installed in transmitter)
(Engineering units for meter display)
(Upper display limit, if applicable)
(Lower display limit, if applicable)
Table continued on next page ⇒
48
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Configuration Data
Setting or Selection
Select or key in the following device-specific information for:
Device Information
Manufacturer *
Model *
Measurement Type *
PROM ID *
Tag
Date
Descriptor
Message
Write protect **
Final assembly number
Device ID *
Revision numbers *
Universal revision *
Field device revision *
Software revision *
* This information is fixed and is read-only.
** Write protect is jumper–selectable on the transmitter PWA.
See Section 8.
PV transfer function
(Output Conformity)
Select either:
PV Damping
(Damping Time Constant)
Select one of these values (in seconds):
SV unit
(Secondary Variable)
Select one of the temperature units for display of the secondary
variable or meter body temperature.
0.00
0.16
Deg C
Poll Address
0.32
0.48
Linear
Square Root
1.00
2.00
deg F
4.00
8.00
16.0
32.0
deg R
K
Select the device address for the transmitter.
Select address 0 for a transmitter operating in analog mode, as well
as support for HART communications. (Factory set address)
Select address 1 to 15 for a transmitter operating in multidrop mode.
Interface menus
Information available through the communicator is accessed through menus. The procedures in this manual
give the shortest path from the “Online” (or HOME) menu. There are alternate paths which, depending on
your starting point, may be better suited.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
49
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Online menu
The online menu is displayed when the communicator is connected to a powered transmitter or the loop
wiring and is switched on. Figure 23 summarizes the menus available from the “Online” menu. A number
in parenthesis (p. 44) refers you to an appropriate page in this manual containing information about that
selection/function.
To HART
Communicator
menu
ONLINE
Device setup
PV (p. 84)
PV AO (p. 84)
PV LRV (p. 54)
PV URV (p. 54)
Process variables
Pressure
AO
Pressure % range (p. 84) SV (p. 85)
Diagnostics/Service
Master reset
Calibration
Device status (p. 109)
Loop test (p. 63)
D/A trim (p. 104)
Basic setup
Tag (p. 52)
PV Unit(p. 53)
Range values (p. 54, 55)
Local Meter (Appendix A)
Device information (p. 56)
PV transfer function (p. 57)
PV Damping (p. 59)
SV units (p. 60)
Detailed setup
Sensors
Signal condition
Output condition
Device information
Same as
shown in
Basic
setup
HOME Menu
Zero trim (p. 66, 76)
Correct input LRV (p. 105)
Apply values (p. 55,68,70,72,73,76,80,82) Correct input URV (p. 105)
Enter values
Reset corrects (p. 107)
Critical (p. 110)
Non-Critical (p. 110)
PV LRV PV LRL
PV URV PV URL
Installed
Units
Manufacturer
Model
Measurement type
PROM ID
Tag (p. 52)
Analog output
HART output
AO out
Loop test (p. 63)
AO Alarm type D/A trim (p. 104)
Scaled D/A trim
(p. 86)
Date
Descriptor
Message (p. 56,88)
Write protect
PV Damping (p. 59)
PV URV (p. 54)
PV LRV (p. 54)
Transfer function (p. 57)
PV % range (p. 84)
Upper
Lower
Final assembly number
Device id
Revision numbers
Universal rev
Field device rev
Software rev
PV
PV unit (p. 53)
Sensor information
SV (p. 85)
Temperature unit
LRL
URL
Poll address
Num request preambles
Review (P. 40)
Manufacturer
Model
Measurement type
PV Unit
PV URL
PV LRL
PV Damping
PV % range
PV Xfer function
PV URV
PV LRV
PV AO
PV AO Alarm type
SV Unit
PROM ID
Tag
Date
Descriptor
Message
Write protect
Final assembly
number
Device id
Universal rev
Field device rev
Software rev
Poll address
Number of
request preambles
Figure 23 Online (or HOME) Menu Summary
50
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Hart Communicator menu
Figure 24 summarizes the menus available from the “HART Communicator” menu. The “HART
Communicator” menu is accessed by backing out (pressing the left arrow on the keypad) from the “Online”
menu.
HART Communicator
Offline
Online
Frequency device
Utility
Offline
New configuration
Saved Configuration
Module, Data pack
or PC contents
Edit
Copy to . . .
Send
Print
Delete
Rename
Compare
Takes you to HOME menu
See Figure 23.
Manufacturer
Model
Field device rev.
From blank template
Mark all
Unmark all
Edit individually
Specifies storage location (memory)
where you want the configuration to
be stored. The configuration name
can be changed, if desired.
Send (download) a saved
configuration to connected device.
Frequency device
Frequency
Pressure
Utility
Configure Communicator
System Information
Listen for PC
Storage Location
Simulation
Selects and compares a device
configuration with another device
configuration.
PV unit
PV Damping
PV URV
PV LRV
Transfer function
Temperature unit
Tag
Message
Save as . . .
Communicator setup and operation settings.
Please refer to the communicator product manual or use the online help
for details on these menu options.
Polling
Contrast
Off Time
Ignore diagnostics
Delete Configuration
Figure 24 HART Communicator Menu Summary
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
51
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Interface keyboard
Figure 25 shows the elements of the HART Communicator keyboard.
Display screen
F1
F2
F3
F4
HART Communicator
I
On/Off
key
>>>
O
Function keys
Pressing these keys issues command
of highlighted text that appears on
display screen directly above them.
Hot key
Arrow keys
A
B
C
D
7
J
Alphanumeric
keypad
K
T
L
M
%
U
V
■
N
W
&
<
■
■
H
I
9
O
P
Q
R
6
X
Y
2
0
■
G
5
1
#
F
8
4
S
E
Z
/
3
■
>
*
_
:
+
■
■
■
■
■
.
Move cursor in direction
indicated (up, down, right, left).
Correspond to arrows on
display screen.
Arrow keys used to indicate
position of characters that appear
at top of buttons in keypad
22899
Figure 25 HART Communicator Keyboard
52
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Interface characteristics
Keep in mind the following display-selection descriptions when configuring a transmitter. These selections
are highlighted at the bottom of the display screen, directly above the four function keys at the top of the
communicator’s keypad (F1, F2, F3, and F4). To make desired highlighted selection, press the
corresponding function key.
Function Key
HOME
Description or Action
Takes you back to the “Online” display.
EXIT
Backs you out of the current display.
END
Backs you out of one level to the next higher level.
ABORT
Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
ESC
Cancels a procedure backing you out of current display, and allows you to
make another choice.
SEND
Downloads the contents of the communicator’s working memory to the
transmitter’s memory. Changes made in the communicator’s working
memory are not transferred to the transmitter until a SEND command is
issued.
If you have not sent the changes and are about to turn off the
communicator, you will receive a prompt warning you that there is unsent
data and asking if you want to send it before shutting off.
NEXT and PREV
ENTER
HELP
DEL
Allows you to scroll through a list of configured parameters.
Allows you to choose the highlighted selection or to continue after
performing an action, such as removing the loop from automatic control.
Gives a brief definition/explanation of the current selection or display.
Deletes character directly beneath flashing cursor.
Symbols
Symbol
Description or Action
♥
Flashing heart icon in the upper right corner of display screen indicates that
the transmitter and communicator are “talking.”
When this symbol appears on the display screen it indicates that you can
press the left arrow on the keypad to back out to another display.
⇑ and/or ⇓
⇒
[>>>]
These arrows appear on the display screen to indicate there is more
information to scroll through, using the indicated arrow on the keypad.
This arrow appears on the display screen to indicate that a menu item
contains more information that can be accessed by pressing the right arrow
on the keypad.
This “hot” key on the keypad allows you to access range values (LRV,
URV, LRL, and URL) directly. When finished, you return to the spot from
which you started.
ATTENTION
An alternate way of selecting a menu item, besides using the up and down arrows, is to press
the key corresponding to the number left of the desired menu item.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
53
6— Configuration - Configuration Overview
Making changes
When a selection in a list is highlighted (see “PV Damping” display below):
Using (⇑ ) and (⇓) arrow keys, scroll through choices until desired selection is highlighted, then press
ENTER ([F4] function key).
ATTENTION
An alternate way of selecting a menu choice is to press the key corresponding to the number
left of the desired menu item. (For example: Pressing “3” would select 0.32 seconds in the PV
Damping display below.)
When current selection is displayed with the same information repeated and highlighted directly beneath it
(see “URV” display below):
Using keypad, key in a new value, then press ENTER ([F4] function key).
ST3000: PT 3011
Pres URV
12.5 inH2O
12.5
HELP
ESC
DEL
ENTER
When keying in alphanumeric characters:
To key in an alpha character or any symbol that appears at the top of a key, first press the arrow key (at
bottom of keypad) indicating the position of that character on the key, then press key. See the example
below to key in the word DATE.
+
=D
+
=A
+
=T
+
=E
To key in a numeric character, merely press the key.
54
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Tag— Entering a Tag Number
Tag— Entering a Tag Number
ATTENTION
If you want to record the configuration data for your transmitter, there is a Configuration
Record Sheet provided in Appendix B.
The procedure in Table 18 shows how to enter a sample tag number of PT 3011 into the transmitter’s
configuration database.
Table 18 Entering Tag Number
Step
Action
1
From the “Online” menu, select “Device setup” (with “Device setup” highlighted, press the right
arrow key (⇒) on keypad).
2
At “Device setup” menu, scroll down to “Basic setup.” Press right arrow key (⇒).
3
With “Tag” highlighted, press right arrow key (⇒).
4
When “Tag” display appears, key in tag name (for example: PT 3011) which can be a
maximum of eight characters.
Refer to “Making changes” in the previous section for information on keying in alphanumeric
characters.
5
Press ENTER.
6
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
55
6— Configuration - PV unit— Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement
PV unit— Selecting Unit of Pressure Measurement
You can choose to have the pressure measurements displayed in one of the pre-programmed engineering
units in the communicator.
The procedure in Table 19 shows how to select the desired pre-programmed engineering units.
Table 19 Selecting Engineering Units
Step
Action
1
From “Online” menu, select “Device setup” and press right arrow key.
2
Scroll down to “Basic setup” and press right arrow key.
3
Scroll down to “PV Unit” and press right arrow key.
4
At “Pressure unit” display, use the [⇑] and [⇓] keys to scroll through available units listed below.
5
InH2O
psi
Pa
inH2O @4degC
InHg
bar
kPa
mmH2O @4degC
ftH2O
mbar
torr
inH2O @60degF
mmH2O
g/Sqcm
atm
mmHg
kg/Sqcm
MPa
When the desired unit is highlighted, press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.
6
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
ATTENTION
Since the engineering units affect the value of LRV and URV, it is recommended that you send
the changed PV unit to the transmitter and then verify and change as required the values of
LRV and URV.
56
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV
Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV
You can set the LRV and URV by either keying in the desired values through the communicator keypad or
applying the corresponding LRV and URV pressures directly to the transmitter.
Procedure for keying in LRV and URV
Table 20 gives the procedure for keying in the range values for a sample 5 to 45 inH2O range. (If inH2O is
not the unit being used, follow the procedure in Table 19 to change it.)
ATTENTION
• ST 3000 Smart Transmitters are factory calibrated with inches of water ranges using inches
of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2˚F (4˚C).
• For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the lower range value as
the URV. For example, to make a 0 to 50 psi range a reverse range, enter 50 as the LRV
and 0 as the URV.
• When setting the range using applied pressures (procedure in Table 21), the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV – LRV). When entering the LRV with the keypad (in Table 20), the URV does not
change automatically.
• If you are using the applied pressure method and must change both the LRV and URV,
always change the LRV first.
Table 20 Keying in LRV and URV
Step
1
Action
Starting at the “Online” menu, press the right arrow key to step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Basic setup
• Range values
• PV LRV
2
Key in the desired LRV setting (for example: 5).
Press ENTER. This takes you back to “Range values” menu.
3
Choose “PV URV” and press right arrow key.
4
Key in the desired URV setting (for example: 45).
Press ENTER.
5
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
57
6— Configuration - Range Values— Setting PV URV and PV LRV
Procedure for setting range values to applied pressure
Table 21 gives the procedure for setting range values to sample applied pressures.
ATTENTION
• When setting the range using applied pressures (procedure in Table 21), the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV – LRV). When entering the LRV with the keypad (in Table 20), the URV does not
change automatically.
• If you are using the applied pressure method and must change both the LRV and URV,
always change the LRV first.
Table 21 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures
Step
1
Action
Starting at the “Online” menu, press the right arrow key to step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
2
When the following display appears
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input.
3
Apply known input pressure to transmitter that represents LRV for 4 mA (0%) output. Press
OK.
4
When the “Current applied process value:” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then
press ENTER. This returns you to display shown in Step 2.
5
Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to set the URV to the applied input pressure for 20 mA output.
6
Select Exit and press ENTER.
You will be prompted to return the loop to automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
ATTENTION
You can also use the local zero and span adjustments on the new smart meter to set the lower
and upper range values to applied pressures. See Appendix A for the procedure.
58
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Device Information
Device Information
Device information menu contains important data for device identification, such as transmitter type, device
tag, serial numbers and revision numbers of the transmitter. Some data is fixed and is read only for
identification purposes. Table 22 outlines the steps for accessing data under the device information menu.
Table 22 Viewing/Entering Device Information Data
Step
Action
1
From “Online” menu, select “Device setup” and press right arrow key.
2
Scroll down to “Basic setup” and press right arrow key.
3
Scroll down to “Device Information” and press right arrow key.
4
At “Device Information” display, use the [⇑] and [⇓] keys to scroll through available parameter
selections listed below.
Parameter
Value
Manufacturer *
Honeywell
Model *
ST3000
Measurement type *
Pressure sensor type (DP, GP, AP)
PROM ID *
10-digit PROM ID number
Tag
PT3011 (or enter an 8 character tag name if one is not
shown)
Date
Enter date
Descriptor
Up to 8 character description
Message
Key in a message (up to 32 characters), if desired.
Write protect **
No (or Yes)
Final assembly number
Up to an 8 digit number
Device ID *
First 7 characters of PROM ID
Revision numbers *
Universal rev
2
Field device rev 1
Software rev
1
* This data is fixed and cannot be changed by reconfiguring the transmitter.
** Write protection is selected by changing a jumper on the transmitter PWA. See Section 8.
5
When the desired parameter is highlighted, press right arrow key.
Note: If the parameter value is highlighted with a blinking cursor, the value can be changed.
Enter a new value, if desired and press ENTER.
Note: Pressing ESC will cancel action without changing selection.
6
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
59
6— Configuration - Pressure transfer function— Selecting Output Conformity
Pressure transfer function— Selecting Output Conformity
Output form options
You can select the transmitter’s output to represent either a straight linear calculation, or a square root
calculation for flow measurement applications using a differential pressure type transmitter. Thus, we refer
to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity or the output form.
The procedure in Table 23 shows how to select the desired Output conformity.
Table 23 Selecting Output Conformity
Step
Action
1
From “Online” menu, select “Device setup” and press right arrow key.
2
Scroll down to “Basic setup” and press the right arrow key.
3
Scroll down to “PV xfer fnctn” and press the right arrow key.
4
Using the [⇑] and [⇓] keys, choose either Linear or Square root, then press ENTER.
5
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
About square root output
For differential pressure transmitters measuring the pressure drop across a primary element, the flow rate is
directly proportional to the square root of the differential or pressure drop. The ST 3000 transmitter’s
output is automatically converted to equal percent of flow when its output conformity is configured as
square root.
You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for comparison purposes.
(Note: This formula assumes that LRV = 0.)
∆P
Span • 100 = %P
Where,
Therefore,
∆P
= Differential pressure input in engineering units
Span
= Transmitter’s measurement span (URV – LRV)
%P
= Pressure input in percent of span
%P
100 • 100 = % Flow
And, you can use this formula to determine the corresponding current output in milliamperes direct current.
(% Flow • 16 mA) + 4 mA = mA dc Output
60
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - Pressure transfer function— Selecting Output Conformity
EXAMPLE:
If you have a differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0 to 100 inches of water
with an input of 49 inches of water, substituting into the previous formulas yields:
49
100 • 100 = 49%
49%
100 • 100 = 70% Flow, and
70% • 16 + 4 = 15.2 mA dc Output
Square root dropout
To avoid unstable output at readings near zero, the ST 3000 transmitter automatically drops square root
conformity and changes to linear conformity for low differential pressure readings. As shown in Figure 26,
the point is near 0.5% of input for ST 3000 transmitters.
0utput
(mA dc)
6.4
Flow
(% of Span)
15
14
13
12
Dropout Points
11
5.6
10
9
re
ua
Sq
8
o
Ro
u
tC
rve
7
6
4.8
5
4
3
2
1
4
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
Differential Pressure (% Full Scale)
Figure 26 Square Root Dropout Point
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
61
6— Configuration - PV damping— Adjusting Damping Time
PV damping— Adjusting Damping Time
You can adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We suggest that you set the damping to the
smallest value that the system can accept.
ATTENTION
The electrical noise effect on the output signal is partially related to the turndown ratio of the
transmitter. As the turndown ratio increases, the peak-to-peak noise on the output signal
increases. You can use this formula to find the turndown ratio using the range information for
your transmitter.
Upper Range Limit
Turndown Ratio = (Upper Range Value – Lower Range Value)
EXAMPLE:
The turndown ratio for a 400 inH2O transmitter with a range of 0 to 50 inH2O would be:
400
8
Turndown Ratio = (50 – 0) = 1 or 8:1
The procedure in Table 24 outlines how to adjust the damping time.
Table 24 Adjusting Damping Time
Step
Action
1
From “Online” menu, select “Device setup” and press right arrow key.
2
Scroll down to “Basic setup” and press right arrow key.
3
Scroll down to “PV Damp” and press right arrow key.
4
At “PV Damping” display, use the [⇑] and [⇓] keys to scroll through selections until desired
value is highlighted. Press ENTER.
The damping values are set at:
0.00 s,
2.00 s,
0.16 s, 0.32 s,
4.00 s, 8.00 s,
0.48 s, 1.00 s,
16.0 s, 32.0 seconds.
If you do not want to change the damping value, press ABORT.
5
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
62
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
6— Configuration - SV units— Selecting Secondary Variable units
SV units— Selecting Secondary Variable units
You can select the temperature units for display of the secondary variable, which is the meter body
temperature.
Table 25 Selecting SV Temperature Units
Step
Action
1
From “Online” menu, select “Device setup” and press right arrow key.
2
Scroll down to “Basic setup” and press right arrow key.
3
Scroll down to “SV Unit” and press right arrow key.
4
Use the [⇑] and [⇓] keys to scroll down to highlight the desired temperature units:
degC
5
degF
degR
Kelvin
When the desired selection is highlighted, press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.
6
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
63
6— Configuration - Poll addr— Selecting Poll Address
Poll addr— Selecting Poll Address
You can select the poll address for the transmitter that determines certain communications characteristics.
HART communications protocol provides for communications to multiple HART devices connected on the
same loop (multidrop mode). In a multidrop mode, each device in the loop must be given a unique address.
A device with a poll address of 1 through 15 is identified as being in multidrop mode. Communication
between the communicator and the devices takes place digitally, with the analog output remaining constant
(fixed at 4 mA average).
A device with a poll address of 0 (zero) will provide a 4 to 20 mA analog output as well as receive
requests and respond to commands from the HART communicator.
The steps in Table 26 show how set the poll address of the transmitter. ST 3000 transmitters are shipped
from the factory with poll address 0.
Table 26 Selecting Poll Address
Step
Action
1
From “Online” menu, select “Device setup” and press right arrow key.
2
Scroll down to “Detailed setup” and press right arrow key.
3
Scroll down to “Output condition” and press right arrow key.
Select “HART output” and press right arrow key.
Press the right arrow key to change “Poll addr” for transmitter.
• Key in address 0 for a transmitter operating in analog mode, as well as support HART
communications.
• Key in address from 1 to 15 for a transmitter operating an a multidrop mode.
5
Press ENTER.
Pressing ESC will cancel procedure without changing unit selection.
6
Either:
• press SEND to download change to transmitter, or
• go to another procedure and continue making changes.
Disconnecting the Communicator
Disconnection checklist
Do the following steps before disconnecting the communicator:
• Make sure the transmitter is not in the current output mode.
• Download all configuration database changes to the transmitter’s memory by selecting SEND.
64
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Overview
7— Start-up
Overview
About this section
This section identifies typical start-up tasks associated with several generic pressure measurement
applications. It also includes the procedure for running an optional analog output check.
This section includes these topics.
Performing an analog output check
Start up procedures for the different types of pressure transmitters in various applications, such as
DP transmitter in a flow measurement
DP transmitter in a pressure measurement
DP transmitter in a liquid level measurement applications
GP transmitter in pressure or liquid level measurement applications
AP transmitter in a pressure measurement
DP transmitter with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application
ATTENTION
All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See Section 6, for
information about poll address.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
65
7— Start-up - Start-up Tasks
Start-up Tasks
About start-up
Once you have installed and configured a transmitter, you are ready to start up the process loop. Start-up
usually includes
• Applying process pressure to the transmitter,
• Checking zero input, and
• Reading input and output.
You can also run an optional output check to “wring out” an analog loop prior to start-up.
Procedure reference
The actual steps in a start-up procedure will vary based on the type of transmitter and the measurement
application. In general, you use the communicator to check the transmitter’s input and output under static
process conditions, and make adjustments as required, before putting the transmitter into full operation with
the running process.
Choose the applicable procedure to reference in this section from Table 27 based on your type of
transmitter and the measurement application. The reference procedure will give you some idea of the
typical tasks associated with starting up a transmitter in a given application.
Table 27 Start-up Procedure Reference
IF transmitter type is ...
Differential Pressure (DP)
66
AND application is ...
THEN reference procedure
in ...
Flow Measurement
Table 29
Pressure Measurement
Table 30
Liquid Level Measurement for
Vented Tank with Dry Reference
Leg*
Table 31
Liquid Level Measurement for
Pressurized Tank with Liquid-Filled
Reference Leg*
Table 32
Gauge Pressure (GP)
Pressure or Liquid Level
Measurement**
Table 33
Absolute Pressure (AP)
Pressure Measurement**
Table 34
DP with Remote Seals
Liquid Level Measurement
Table 35
*
These applications also apply for flange-mounted liquid level type transmitters that are usually
mounted directly to a flange at the zero level of the tank.
**
These applications also apply for GP and AP type transmitters equipped with remote seals.
However, you can only confirm that input pressure correlates with transmitter output in processes using
remote seal connections.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Running Analog Output
Running Analog Output
Background
You can put the transmitter into a constant-current source mode to check out other instruments in the loop
such as recorders, controllers, and positioners. Using the communicator, you can tell the transmitter to
change its output to any value between 4 mA (1V or 0%) and 20 mA (5V or 100%) and maintain that
output. This makes it easy to verify loop operation through the accurate simulation of transmitter output
signals before bringing the loop on line. Note that the constant-current source mode is also referred to as
the output mode.
ATTENTION
The transmitter does not measure the input or update the output while it is in the constantcurrent source mode.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 28 outlines the steps for using a transmitter in the constant current source mode.
Table 28 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source (Output) Mode
Step
1
Action
Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on. If possible, locate communicator
where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If you want to verify loop
calibration, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2
From the “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections by highlighting and
pressing the right arrow key:
• Device setup
• Dig/Service
• Loop test
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
3
At the “Choose analog output level” display, select 4mA to set the output signal level to 4 mA
(1.0V or 0%).
Press ENTER. The communicator notifies you that the transmitter’s output is fixed at 4 mA.
4
Check that receiving device indication is at its 0% point. If applicable, check that milliammeter
reading is 4 mA or voltmeter reading is 1.0V.
If indication is inaccurate, check the calibration of receiving device.
Use the transmitter output as a calibration input source for instruments in the loop.
• If you want to choose a 20 mA output value, then press OK and go to Step 5.
• If you want to choose another output value, then press OK and go to Step 7.
• If you have completed the loop test, then press OK and go to Step 8.
5
Select 20mA to set output signal to 20 mA (5.0V or 100%).
Press ENTER. The communicator notifies you that the transmitter ‘s output is fixed at 20 mA.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
67
7— Start-up - Running Analog Output
Step
6
Action
Check that receiving device indication is at its 100% point. If applicable, check that
milliammeter reading is 20 mA or voltmeter reading is 5.0V.
• If you want to choose another output value, then press OK and go to Step 7.
• If you have completed the loop test, then press OK and go to Step 8.
7
Select Other and press ENTER, then use communicator’s keyboard to enter other values.
For example,
Transmitter output
If you want an output of:
8.0 mA
8.8 mA
12.0 mA
16.0 mA
2.0V
2.2V
3.0V
4.0V
PV in %
25%
30%
50%
75%
Communicator keystrokes
press 8 and ENTER.
press 8.8 and ENTER.
press 12 and ENTER.
press 16 and ENTER.
The communicator notifies you that the transmitter’s output is fixed at that value.
When you have completed the loop test, press OK and go to Step 8.
8
Select “End” and press ENTER. The communicator will notify you that it is returning the
transmitter to its original output.
A screen will prompt you to return the loop to automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
Voltmeter
Precision
Milliammeter
Field
Terminals
Red +
+
+
Power
Supply
-
-
LP
Black -
HP
250 Ω
Receiver
+
HART hand-held
Commnicator
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
Note: Polarity of the Communicator
connection does not matter.
Figure 27 Typical Communicator and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source
(Output) Mode
68
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 29 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid flow measurement application. Refer to Figure 28 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 27 for typical communicator and meter connections.
LP Blockoff
LP
HP
Plug G
Plug F
HP Blockoff
Valve B
Valve A
Valve C
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
Figure 28 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter
ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 29, we are assuming that all the valves on the three-valve manifold
and the block-off valves were closed at installation.
Table 29 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
69
7— Start-up - Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter
Step
2
Action
Open equalizer valve C.
Refer to Figure 28 for sample piping arrangement.
3
Open valves A and HP block-off to make differential pressure zero (0) by applying same
pressure to both sides of meter body.
Allow system to stabilize at full static pressure—zero differential.
4
At the “Online” menu, read the applied input pressure (PV).
Also check that the PV analog output displays a corresponding zero input pressure.
5
Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
If communicator and milliammeter readings are…
• exactly 4 mA, then go to Step 9.
• not exactly 4 mA, then go to Step 6.
6
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Zero trim
7
Under “Zero trim” do the following when prompted:
• Remove the loop from automatic control, then press OK.
• Press OK when warned that this will affect sensor calibration.
• Press OK when “Apply 0 input to sensor.” display appears.
You will receive a message telling you that the sensor input is stabilizing, then the sensor zero
succeeded.
• Return the loop to automatic control, then press OK.
8
Press HOME to return to “Online” menu. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
9
Close equalizer valve C.
10
Open valve B and LP block-off valve to begin measuring process differential pressure.
11
Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied input pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting, if necessary.
12
70
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 30 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
pressure measurement application. Refer to Figure 29 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 27 for typical communicator and meter connections.
Valve D
Plug C
Valve A
H
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
HP side
HP Vent
LP side
LP Vent
Figure 29 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter
Table 30 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2
Close valve D.
Refer to Figure 29 for sample piping arrangement.
3
Open plug C and valve A to apply head pressure H to meter body. Then, open LP vent.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure
4
6/05
At “Online” menu, read present LRV setting.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
71
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
Step
5
Action
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue
6
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
7
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
8
When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9
10
Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
11
At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding zero line pressure plus head
pressure H. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
12
Close plug C
13
Open valve D to begin measuring process line pressure.
14
Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied line pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
15
72
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank
Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank
Procedure
The procedure in Table 31 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid level measurement application for a vented tank with a dry reference leg. Refer to Figure 30 for the
piping arrangement identification and Figure 27 for typical communicator and meter connections.
Valve A
Plug C
Tap location at
the minimum level
to be measured
To HP connection
on meter body
H
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
LP Vent
Figure 30 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Vented Tank
ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 31, we are assuming that the tank is empty and the piping
arrangement includes a block-off valve.
Table 31 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2
Close block-off valve A.
Refer to Figure 30 for sample piping arrangement.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
73
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Vented Tank
Step
3
Action
Open plug C.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure.
4
At “Online” menu, read present LRV setting.
5
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
6
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
7
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
8
When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9
10
Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
11
At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
head pressure H. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
12
Close plug C.
13
Open valve A to begin measuring tank pressure. Leave LP side vented to atmosphere.
ATTENTION
If the URV was calculated on the approximate density of the liquid and/or tank height, the
exact URV can be set by filling the tank to the desired full scale level and then setting the URV
through the communicator. See Range Values in Section 6 for details.
74
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
Step
Action
14
Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
applied tank level pressure.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting, if needed.
15
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
Procedure
The procedure in Table 32 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter in a
liquid level measurement application for a pressurized tank with a liquid-filled (wet) reference leg. Refer to
Figure 31 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 27 for typical communicator and meter
connections.
Valve B
Plug D
Plug C at
zero level
Valve A
H1
Tap location at the
minimum level to be
measured
h
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
HP side of transmitter
Figure 31 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Pressurized Tank.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
75
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 32, we are assuming:
• The tank is empty and the reference leg is filled.
• The high pressure (HP) side of the transmitter is connected to the wet reference leg. Note
that the transmitter will work if the HP side is connected to the bottom of the tank, but not
within the guaranteed accuracy specifications.
• The transmitter is mounted below the zero level of the tank, so “h” is greater than zero. If h
equals zero, plug C is eliminated from the piping and the LP vent is opened instead.
Table 32 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2
Close block-off valves A and B.
Refer to Figure 31 for sample piping arrangement.
3
Open plugs C and D.
Allow system to stabilize at head pressure.
4
At “Online” menu, read present LRV setting.
5
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
6
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
76
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement – Pressurized Tank
Step
Action
7
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
8
When the display in Step 6 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9
10
Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
11
At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
head pressure H1. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
12
• If you cannot fill tank, then go to Step 13
• If you can fill tank to desired full-scale level, then go to Step 14
13
Key in URV that is equal to full tank pressure. See Range values in Section 6 for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 24
14
Close plugs C and D.
15
Open valves A and B. Fill tank to desired full scale level.
16
At “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), read present URV setting.
17
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
18
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 20mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 20 mA input. Press OK.
19
6/05
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 20mA value” then
press ENTER.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
77
7— Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
Step
20
Action
When the display in Step 18 appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
21
Press HOME to return to the “Online” display.
22
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
23
At “Process variables” display, read 100% output for corresponding full tank pressure applied.
Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA (100%) output.
24
Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
empty and full tank pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting, if needed.
Ranging the transmitter in this way makes it reverse acting.
25
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 33 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge pressure (GP) type transmitter in a
pressure or liquid level measurement application. Refer to Figure 32 and Figure 33 for the piping
arrangement identification and Figure 27 for typical communicator and meter connections..
Block-off
valve no.1
Pipe
Plug
Union
Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter
Process
Block-off
valve no.2
Tee connector
Figure 32 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type
Transmitter
78
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
To Process Head
connection on
meter body
Block-off
valve
Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter
Tap location at the minimum
level to be measured
Figure 33 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type
Transmitter.
ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 33, we are assuming that piping arrangement includes a block-off
valve and a Tee-connector. If your piping does not include a Tee-connector, you can only
verify that the input and output readings correlate.
Table 33 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
2
Close block-off valve.
Refer to Figure 32 or Figure 33 for sample piping arrangement.
3
Remove plug from Tee-connector to vent it to atmosphere, if applicable.
Allow system to stabilize at static pressure.
4
At “Online” menu, read applied input pressure (PV) which should be zero.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.
5
Optional (read output in % of range): From “Online” menu, step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding input pressure. Check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
79
7— Start-up - Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter
Step
6
Action
If communicator and milliammeter readings are zero (4 mA), then go to Step 9.
If communicator and milliammeter readings are not zero (4 mA) and Tee-connector is level with
transmitter, then go to Step 7
If communicator and milliammeter readings are not zero (4 mA) and Tee-connector is above
transmitter, then go to Step 8
7
From “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Zero trim
Under “Zero trim” do the following when prompted:
• Remove the loop from automatic control, then press OK.
• Press OK when warned that this will affect sensor calibration.
• Press OK when “Apply 0 input to sensor.” display appears.
You will receive a message telling you that the sensor input is stabilizing, then the sensor zero
succeeded.
• Return the loop to automatic control, then press OK.
Go to Step 9.
8
From “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER.
80
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP
Step
Action
8,
cont’d
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
9
Close Tee-connector and slowly open block-off valve to apply process pressure to transmitter.
10
Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
zero and full-scale pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
11
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
Pressure Measurement with AP
Procedure
The procedure in Table 34 outlines the steps for starting up an absolute pressure (AP). type transmitter in a
pressure measurement application. Refer to Figure 34 for the piping arrangement identification and
Figure 27 for typical communicator and meter connections.
Shut-off
valve no.1
Pipe
Plug
Union
Absolute
Pressure
Transmitter
Shut-off
valve no.2
Process
Tee connector
For additional overrrange protection, use
Sprague engineering type gauge saver or
Fairchild model 95 gauge guard (style 1)
Figure 34 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type
Transmitter
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
81
7— Start-up - Pressure Measurement with AP
ATTENTION
For AP transmitters, you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate.
Table 34 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement.
Step
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop.
2
Set process pressure to zero level, if possible.
Allow system to stabilize at zero pressure.
3
At “Online” menu, read applied input pressure (PV) which should be zero level.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.
4
Optional (read output in % of range):
Read barometric pressure and confirm with local source, (for example, weather station, airport,
or other reference).
5
From “Online” menu, step through the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
6
At “Process variables” display, read output. Compare local reference pressure with transmitter
in % of span. Check that milliammeter reading corresponds to output.
7
Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
zero and full-scale pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
8
82
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Procedure
The procedure in Table 35 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter
with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application.. Refer to Figure 35 for the piping
arrangement identification and Figure 27 for typical communicator and meter connections.
LP Side
Full Level
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter with
remote seals
H2
Fixed
Ref. Leg
Variable
Head H1
Zero Level (empty)
HP Side
Figure 35 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter with Remote Seals
ATTENTION
For the procedure in Table 35, we are assuming that
• The tank is empty and the remote seal flanges are installed at their final positions.
• The DP transmitter has its high pressure (HP) side connected to the tank’s lower flange and
low pressure (LP) side connected to the upper flange.
Table 35 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring; turn it on and establish communications. If
possible, locate communicator where you can also view receiver instrument in control loop. If
you want to verify transmitter output, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to
compare readings.
Refer to Figure 27 for sample communicator and meter connections in a typical analog loop
with a differential pressure-type transmitter.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
83
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Step
2
Action
• If you cannot empty tank, then go to Step 3.
• If you can empty tank, then go Step 4.
3
Key in LRV that is equal to empty tank pressure. See Section 6.7 in this manual for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 7.
You can use this formula to calculate LRV in inH2O.
LRV =
(H2 x Sf) x –1
H2 =
Height of fixed reference leg in inches.
Sf =
Specific gravity of remote seal fill fluid.
The LRV calculation must be multiplied by –1 since pressure in on the low side of the meter
body.
EXAMPLE: If H2 equaled 12 feet and the fill fluid was silicone oil, substituting into the formula
yields: LRV = (12 ft x 12 in x 0.94) x –1
LRV = –135.36 inH2O
ATTENTION
The specific gravity of silicone oil fill fluid (DC200) is 0.94 and fluorolube fill fluid (CTFE) is
1.84.
4
If applicable, press HOME to return to “Online” menu. Step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 4mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 4 mA input. Press OK.
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 4mA value” then press
ENTER. LRV is set to fixed reference leg pressure H2 times density of remote seal fill fluid
multiplied by –1 (pressure on low side of meter body).
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
84
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Step
5
Action
Press HOME to return to “Online” menu. Read applied input pressure (PV) which should be
zero.
Also read PV analog output which should be 4 mA to correspond with 0% output.
6
Optional (read output in % of range): From “Online” menu, step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
At “Process variables” display, read 0% output for corresponding empty tank pressure plus
reference pressure H2. Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%) output.
7
• If you cannot fill tank, then go to Step 8.
• If you can fill tank, then go Step 9.
8
Key in URV that is equal to full tank pressure. See Range Values in Section 6 for details on
keying in a range value.
Go to Step 12.
You can use these formulas to calculate URV in inH2O.
Span = H1 x SL
H1 =
Height of variable head in inches.
SL =
Specific gravity of measured liquid.
URV =
Span + LRV
EXAMPLE: If H1 equaled 10 feet, the measured liquid was water, and the LRV equaled –
135.36 inH2O; substituting into the formulas yields:
Span = 10 ft x 12 in x 1.00
Span = 120 inH2O
120 inH2O + –135.36 inH2O
–15.36 inH2O
URV =
URV =
ATTENTION
The specific gravity of water at 60°F (15.6°C) is 1.00.
9
From “Online” menu (if applicable, press HOME to get there), step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Apply values
You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK to
continue.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
85
7— Start-up - Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals
Step
9,
cont’d
Action
When the following display appears,
ST3000: PT 3011
Set the:
1
2
3
4mA
20mA
Exit
ABORT
ENTER
choose 20mA, then press ENTER.
A display will prompt you to apply new 20 mA input. Press OK.
When “Current applied process value” display appears, choose “Set as 20mA value” then
press ENTER. URV is set to full tank pressure.
When the display above appears, choose Exit, then press ENTER.
Return the loop to automatic control.
10
Press HOME to return to “Online” menu. With full tank pressure applied, read PV analog
output which should be 20 mA to correspond with 100% output.
11
Optional (read output in % of range): From “Online” menu, step through the following menu
selections:
• Device setup
• Process variables
At “Process variables” display, read 100% output for corresponding full tank. Check that
milliammeter reading is 20 mA (100%) output.
12
Take communicator and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to
empty and full tank pressures.
If readings do not correspond, check that transmitter has been installed correctly. If applicable,
blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check communicator and milliammeter readings again. If readings are still not correct, verify
transmitter’s configuration data and change its range setting if needed.
13
86
Remove communicator and milliammeter from loop.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
8— Operation - Introduction
8— Operation
Introduction
About this section
This section identifies how to access typical data associated with the operation of an ST 3000 transmitter.
It also includes procedures for:
changing the default failsafe direction of the transmitter’s output,
changing the read/write access of the transmitter’s configuration database, and
saving and/or restoring a transmitter’s configuration database.
Accessing Operation Data
Summary
You can access this data relevant to the operation of the transmitter using a hand-held communicator.
Input
Failsafe Output Direction
Output in % or milliamperes
Sensor Temperature
Upper and Lower Range Limits
Messages
Status
Table 36 summarizes the steps required to access given operation data from the transmitter. These steps
assume that communicator communications have been established with the transmitter. All steps start at the
“Online” (or HOME) display. The values shown in displays are for example purposes only.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
87
8— Operation - Accessing Operation Data
Table 36 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access
What you want to view
Present input pressure.
What to do
Read PV from “Online” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Online
1
2
3
4
5
Device setup
PV
PV AO
PV LRV
PV URV
–0.00745 inH2O
11.989 mA
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
You may need to select PV and press the right
arrow key to view PV value.(See Note.)
Present transmitter output in percent.
Select: Device setup
Process variables
Read Pres % rnge from “Process variables”
display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Process variables
1
2
3
4
Pres
% rnge
AO
SV
HELP
Present transmitter output in milliamperes.
–0.00745 inH2O
49.95%
11.992 mA
23.50 degC
HOME
Read PV AO from “Online” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Online
1
2
3
4
5
Upper and Lower Range Limits of the transmitter.
Device setup
PV
PV AO
PV LRV
PV URV
–0.00745 inH2O
11.989 mA
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
Press the [>>>] key.
Read PV LRL and PV URL from “Range values”
display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Range values
1
2
3
4
PV LRV
PV URV
PV LRL
PV URL
–12.5 inH2O
12.5 inH2O
0.00 inH2O
400.7 inH2O
HELP
You may need to select PV LRL and PV URL and
press the right arrow key to view the values. (See
Note.)
88
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
8— Operation - Accessing Operation Data
What you want to view
Status of transmitter operation at the present
time.
What to do
Select: Device setup
Diag/Service
Device status
Select either “Critical” or “Non-Critical” from the
“Device status” display.
Warnings, status messages, and error messages
appear on screen as necessary. Refer to Section
11 in this manual for further information.
Present failsafe output direction, which depends
on the position of the internal failure mode alarm
jumper.
Select: Device setup
Detailed setup
Output condition
Analog output
Read AO Alrm typ from “Analog output” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Analog output
1
2
3
4
5
AO
AO Alrm typ
Loop test
D/A trim
Scaled D/A trim
HOME
HELP
Present sensor temperature (±5°C) measured by
circuitry in the transmitter’s sensor.
11.990 mA
Hi
Choose: Device setup
Detailed setup
Sensors
Read SV from “Sensors” display
ST3000: PT 3011
Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
PV
-0.0134 inH2O
PV unit
inH2O
Sensor information
23.42 degC
SV
SV unit
degC
HELP
Present information in the message (or
scratchpad) area.
HOME
Choose: Device setup
Basic setup
Device information
Message
Read present information in “Message” display.
ST3000: PT 3011
Message
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
CALIBRATED BY JOE 12 02 98
HELP
DEL
ESC
ENTER
Note: Some values for PV, PV LRV and PV URV may not be visible in some displays, (due to the limitations
of the communicator display). To view these values you must use the down arrow key to select the
value and then press the right arrow key to display the value in detail.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
89
8— Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers
Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers
Default failsafe direction
Transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale. This means that the transmitter’s
output will be driven upscale (maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.
The upscale failsafe action will drive an analog transmitter’s output to 20.8 mA or a downscale action will
drive its output to 3.8 mA.
The HART communicator parameter PV AO Alrm Typ identifies the failsafe direction of the transmitter.
The parameter indicates failsafe action as either Hi (upscale) or Lo (downscale).
Write protect option
Transmitters are shipped with a default jumper position for read and write access. This means that the
transmitter’s configuration database can be overwritten.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 37 outlines the steps for cutting the failsafe jumper and/or repositioning the write
protect jumper on the transmitter’s Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA). Figure 36 shows the location of the
jumpers on the PWA of ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters.
ESD HAZARD
The nature of the integrated circuitry used in the transmitter’s PWA makes it susceptible to
damage by stray static discharges when it is removed from the transmitter. Follow these tips to
minimize chances of static electricity damage when handling the PWA.
• Never touch terminals, connectors, component leads, or circuits when handling the PWA.
• When removing or installing the PWA, hold it by its edges or mounting bracket only. If you
must touch the PWA circuits, be sure you are grounded by staying in contact with a
grounded surface or wearing a grounded wrist strap.
• As soon as the PWA is removed from the transmitter, put it in an electrically conductive bag
or wrap it in aluminum foil to protect it.
Write Protect
Jumper
W
Printed Wiring
Assembly
R
Read and
Write
Read Only
W
1
Failsafe
Direction
Jumper
Figure 36 Location of Failsafe and Write Protect Jumpers on PWA
90
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
8— Operation - Changing Default Failsafe Direction and Write Protect Jumpers
Table 37 Changing Default Failsafe Direction or Write Protect Jumper
Step
Action
1
Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side
of transmitter housing.
2
If equipped with a local smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to remove it
from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly.
3
Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from housing.
Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire power connector from PWA,
and remove PWA. See figure.
Connectors
Retaining Clip
PWA
Electronics
Housing
ATTENTION
The PWA board has components on both sides. The failsafe and write protect jumpers are
located on the side with the most components, which is also the same side as the flex tape
and power connector pins.
4
With the PWA component side (from which you unplugged the flex tape and power
connectors) facing you and referring to Figure 36, locate
• Failsafe jumper (W1).
If you want to change the failsafe action from upscale to downscale, cut jumper in half with a
small wire cutter.
• Write protect jumper (W2).
If you want to change read and write access to read only, move jumper to the R position.
5
Reverse steps 2 and 3 to reassemble mounting bracket and PWA in transmitter housing.
ATTENTION
Be sure to orient local smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate
the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.
6/05
6
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
7
Turn ON transmitter power.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
91
8— Operation - Writing Data in the Message Area
Writing Data in the Message Area
The message area is a 32-character field containing such information as transmitter location, service,
record, scratchpad, etc. This data can be entered using the communicator.
The procedure in Table 38 outlines the steps for entering a sample message. This procedure assumes that
communicator communications have been established with the transmitter.
Table 38 Writing Data in the Message Area
Step
1
Action
Starting at the “Online” menu, choose (by highlighting and pressing the right arrow key) the
following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Basic setup
• Device information
• Message
A display similar to the one below will appear.
ST3000: PT 3011
Message
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
CALIBRATED BY JOE 12 02 98
HELP
2
DEL
ESC
ENTER
Using the alphanumeric keypad, enter desired message. What you are entering will overwrite
the previous message in the highlighted area. If you make a mistake, press DEL to delete
character beneath blinking cursor.
Refer to “Making changes” in Section 6 for information on using the alphanumeric keypad and
alpha position indicator arrow keys.
92
3
Press ENTER to save data in message area. (If you press ESC, you will exit message area
without saving change.)
4
When all desired changes have been made, press SEND to download changes from the
communicator memory to the transmitter.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
8— Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Background
If it ever becomes necessary to replace a damaged transmitter with a spare, you can save the configuration
database from the damaged transmitter to the memory module or data pack installed in the communicator,
then restore (or send) the saved configuration database from that memory to the spare transmitter. In fact,
you can restore the saved configuration database in any number of transmitters as long as you change the
tag number (ID) in the restored database.
Figure 37 shows a graphic summary of the save and restore database function.
Saved Configuration Database
Pressure unit
Pres damp
Pres URV
Pres LRV
Pres xfer fnctn
Temp unit
Tag
Message
Restored Configuration Database
inH2O
0.48 s
400 inH2O
0 inH2O
Linear
degC
PT3011
Tank Pressure
Pressure unit
Pres damp
Pres URV
Pres LRV
Pres xfer fnctn
Temp unit
Tag
Message
Memory Module
or
Data Pack
Working
Memory
Working
Memory
SEND
SAVE
ST 3000
inH2O
0.48 s
400 inH2O
0 inH2O
Linear
degC
PT3011
Tank Pressure
Communicator
ST 3000
Figure 37 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
93
8— Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Procedures
The procedure in Table 39 outlines the steps for saving a configuration database from a transmitter.
Table 40 provides the procedure for downloading (sending) a saved configuration database to a transmitter.
Table 39 Saving a Configuration Database
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring for transmitter with configuration database to be
saved and turn it on.
2
Starting at the “Online” menu, choose SAVE. The Save as . . . screen will appear.
ST3000:PT 3011
Save as . . .
1
2
3
HELP
Location
Name
Data Type
Module
Standard
SAVE
3
Select Location and choose the memory location where you want to save the transmitter
configuration, (Module, data pack or PC, if available). Press ENTER.
4
Select Name and type in the name of the configuration file. Press ENTER.
5
Select Data Type and choose either Standard or Full (for PC). Press ENTER.
6
Press SAVE. A prompt may say that some variables in this configuration were not marked
because they were not read. Press OK.
A prompt may ask if you want to overwrite the existing configuration memory.
Press YES or NO.
The Online screen will appear when save is completed.
7
94
Disconnect communicator from transmitter loop wiring and turn communicator off.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
8— Operation - Saving and Restoring a Configuration Database
Table 40 Downloading a Configuration Database
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator to loop wiring for transmitter whose database is to be restored and turn
it on.
2
Back out to “Offline” display, select Saved Configuration to show the following display.
HART Communicator
Saved Configuration
1
2
3
Module Contents
data pack Contents
PC
HELP
3
Select the memory location of the saved configuration file and press the right arrow key.
4
Select the file name of the saved configuration. Press the right arrow key.
5
The Saved configuration display appears.
HART Communicator
Saved Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
Edit
Copy to . . .
Send
Print
Delete
HELP
Select “Send” and press right arrow key.
When prompted to put loop into manual, press OK.
The selected configuration is downloaded (sent) to the transmitter’s memory.
6
6/05
Back out to “Offline” display, then choose Online. You can now change the tag number and
other configuration data, as required.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
95
-
96
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
6/05
9— Maintenance - Introduction
9— Maintenance
Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about preventive maintenance routines and replacing damaged parts. The
topics covered in this section are:
Preventive maintenance of the meter body barrier diaphragms and process piping to the transmitter.
Replacement of damaged parts such as the transmitter PWA and meter body.
Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance routines and schedules
The ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance routine at regularly scheduled
intervals. However, you should consider carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines on
a schedule that is dictated by the characteristics of the process medium being measured and whether blowdown facilities or purge systems are being used.
Check piping for leaks.
Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter.
Clean the transmitter’s pressure chambers including the barrier diaphragms.
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being measured, sediment or other foreign
particles may collect in the process head cavity/chamber and cause faulty measurement. In addition, the
barrier diaphragm or diaphragms in the transmitter’s meter body may become coated with a residue from
the process medium. The latter is also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type
transmitters.
In most cases, you can readily remove the process head or heads from the transmitter’s meter body to clean
the process head cavity and inspect the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms. For flange mount and remote seal
diaphragms, you may only need to run a purge line in the tank to rinse off the face of the diaphragm.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 41 outlines the general steps for inspecting and cleaning barrier diaphragms. You
may have to modify the steps to meet your particular process or transmitter model requirements. Figure 38
shows an exploded view of a DP transmitter’s meter body for reference.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
97
9— Maintenance - Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Table 41 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Step
Action
1
Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process. Open vent in process head to drain fluid
from transmitter’s meter body, if required.
ATTENTION
We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area
before taking it apart.
2
Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter body. Remove process
heads and bolts. See Figure 38.
3
Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent.
4
Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion. Look for possible residue
and clean if necessary.
If diaphragm is dented, has distorted convolutions or radial wrinkles, performance may be
affected. Contact TAC for assistance.
5
Replace O-ring.
ATTENTION
• We recommend that you install a new O-ring whenever a process head is removed for
cleaning.
• The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head design has two O-ring
grooves. A large one which is 2 inches (50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3
inches (33 mm) in diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high pressure model
STG180, GP transmitters, use the small O-ring in the smaller/inner groove. On other
models of GP and AP transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use
both O-rings together.
Larger O-ring
groove for
lower pressure
applications
Smaller O-ring
groove for
high pressure
applications
22518
GP/AP Process Head
• For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head design, see illustration for
differential pressure transmitters in Figure 38.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
98
9— Maintenance - Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Step
Action
6
Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such as “Neverseize” or
equivalent.
7
Replace process head or heads and bolts. Finger tighten nuts.
8
Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 42, in sequence
shown in following illustration. Tighten head bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque,
and then full torque.
Always tighten head bolts in
sequence shown and in these
stages:
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque
9
1
3
4
2
Return transmitter to service.
CAUTION
Do not exceed the overload rating when placing the transmitter back into service or during
cleaning operations. See Overpressure ratings in Section 3 of this manual.
Nuts
O-ring
Bolts
Process
head
O-ring
Center
section
Process
head
Figure 38 Disassembly of DP Transmitter Process Heads from Meter Body
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
99
9— Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
Torque ratings Table 42 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type.
Table 42 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings
Meter Body
Type
Process Head
Bolting Size
Draft Range
Transmitter
7/16 x 14 UNC
7/16 x 20 UNF
M12 x 1.75
All Other DP,
GP and AP
Transmitters
M12 x 1.75
7/16 x 20 UNF
7/16 x 14 UNC
3/8 x 16 UNC
M8 x 1.25
5/16 x 18 UNC
Carbon Steel –
Standard; no option
specified
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]
NA
B7M Bolting
[“B7” Option]
Bolting Type
Stainless Steel NACE
[“CR” Option]
316 Stainless Steel
Non-NACE [“SS”
Option]
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft] [15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft] [15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]
NA
25,8 N-m +/- 1,3 N-m
NA
[19.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]
NA
NA
NA
25,8 N-m +/- 1,3 N-m
[19.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]
63,7 N-m +/- 3,2 N-m
NA
[47.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.4 Lb-Ft]
NA
NA
NA
63,7 N-m +/- 3,2 N-m
[47.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.4 Lb-Ft]
67,8 N-m +/- 3,4 N-m
48,8 N-m +/- 2,4 N-m
56,9 N-m +/- 2,8 N-m
[50.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.5 Lb-Ft] [36.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft] [42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft]
39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m
NA
39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m
[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]
[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]
27,1 N-m +/- 1,4 N-m
NA
NA
[20.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]
NA
NA
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]
NA
NA
56,9 N-m +/- 2,8 N-m
[42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft]
39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m
[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]
NA
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]
Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
About the PWA Electronics Board
The circuitry in the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters is of the single PWA design. The PWA contains
connectors for the flex-tape conductor from the sensor, the loop power wires and a connector for the
optional smart meter cable.
The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for replacing the PWA.
Table 43 Replacing PWA
Step
1
Action
Turn OFF transmitter power.
ATTENTION
We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area
before taking it apart..
2
Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of transmitter housing.
ESD HAZARD
We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling the PWA, since
electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit components.
3
6/05
a)
If equipped with a local smart meter, carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to
remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
100
9— Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
Step
Action
assembly.
b)
Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from
housing.
c)
Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire power connector from
PWA, and remove PWA.
Transmitter
End Caps
PWA and
Mounting Bracket
Flex-Tape Connector
Local Smart
Meter
Power
Connector
Meter
Cable
4
• If your transmitter has local smart meter option, then go to Step 5.
• If your transmitter does not have local smart meter option, then go to Step 7.
5
Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA (side without cable connectors). Unplug meter
cable from connector on PWA. Remove screw retainers from other side of mounting screws so
you can remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA. Set PWA aside.
Mounting Screws
PWA Connector Side
1
Meter cable is installed
between PWA and
mounting bracket.
W
R
W
Meter Cable
6
6/05
Restraining
Clip
Mounting
Bracket
J4 Meter
Connector
Orient mounting bracket as noted above with meter cable still located in slot on its right-hand
side, install mounting screws through bracket and replacement PWA, and install retainers to
hold screws in place. Plug meter cable into connector J4 on PWA and be sure cable is still
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
101
9— Maintenance - Replacing Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
Step
Action
under restraining clip on front of bracket. Go to Step 9.
7
Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA (side without cable connectors). Remove screw
retainers from other side of mounting screws so you can remove screws and mounting bracket
from PWA. Set PWA aside.
Mounting Screws
1
PWA Connector Side
W
R
W
Mounting
Bracket
8
Orient mounting bracket as noted above, install mounting screws through bracket and
replacement PWA, and install retainers to hold screws in place.
9
Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3, as applicable, to install PWA and bracket to transmitter
housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
10
Recalibrate transmitter. Refer to Section 10 for proper procedure.
ATTENTION
Be sure to orient local smart meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate
the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.
6/05
11
Return transmitter to service and turn ON power.
12
If applicable, verify local smart meter configuration data. Reconfigure selected engineering
units and lower and upper display range values as required. (See Appendix A for details.)
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
102
9— Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body
Replacing Meter Body
You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or only the meter body on selected DP,
GP and AP transmitters by using the existing process head(s).
Use the procedure in Table 44 to install a meter body only.
Table 44 Replacing Meter Body Only
Step
Action
1
Complete first 3 Steps in Table 43, as applicable, to remove PWA.
2
Use 4 mm size hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside housing.
Set Screw
Process Head
Process Head
Meter Body
3
Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it from electronics housing.
4
Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center section. Remove process
heads and bolts
5
Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent.
6
Replace O-ring.
ATTENTION
The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head design has two O-ring
grooves. A large one which is 2 in (50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3 in (33
mm) in diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high-pressure, model STG180, GP
transmitters, be sure to use a small O-ring in the smaller/inner groove. On other models of GP
and AP transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use both O-rings
together.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
103
9— Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body
Step
Action
6,
cont’d
Smaller O-ring
groove for
high pressure
applications
Larger O-ring
groove for
lower pressure
applications
22518
GP/AP Process Head
• For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head design, see detail illustration for
differential pressure transmitters in Figure 38.
7
Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such as “Neverseize” or
equivalent.
8
Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new meter body. Finger tighten nuts.
Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter Meter Body
Nuts
Flex Tape
O-ring
O-ring
HP S
Bolts
IDE
Process
head
LP S
ID
E
Meter
Body
Process
head
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
104
9— Maintenance - Replacing Meter Body
Step
Action
9
Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 42 in sequence
shown in following illustration. Tighten head bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque,
and then full torque.
Always tighten head bolts in
sequence shown and in these
stages:
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque
1
3
4
2
22519
10
Feed flex tape on new meter body through neck of housing and screw new meter body into
housing until bottom of header portion of center section is approximately flush with neck of
electronics housing.
11
Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in header. Loosen set screw half
turn, rotate housing to desired position and tighten set screw.
12
Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 in Table 43, as applicable, to return PWA and bracket to
transmitter housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning
#33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
13
Recalibrate transmitter. Refer to Section 10 for proper procedure.
ATTENTION
Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper viewing through end-cap window. You can
rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments.
6/05
14
Return transmitter to service and turn ON power
15
Verify transmitter’s configuration data. Restore saved database, if applicable.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
105
-
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
106
10— Calibration - Introduction
10— Calibration
Introduction
About this section
This section provides information about calibrating the transmitter’s analog output and measurement range.
It also covers the procedure for resetting calibration to default values as a quick alternative to measurement
range calibration.
This section includes these topics.
How to calibrate the transmitter’s analog output circuit using the communicator
How to perform a two-point calibration of the transmitter
How to perform a corrects reset to return the transmitter calibration to its default values.
Overview
About calibration
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter does not require recalibration at periodic intervals to maintain accuracy. If
a recalibration is required, we recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter removed
from the process and located in a controlled environment to get the best accuracy.
Before you recalibrate the transmitter’s measurement range, you must calibrate the transmitter’s analog
output signal. See Table 44 for procedure.
You can also use the communicator to reset the calibration data to default values, if they are corrupted,
until the transmitter can be recalibrated. See Table 46 in this section for details.
ATTENTION
All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See Section 6, for
information about poll address.
Equipment Required
ATTENTION
Depending upon the calibration you choose, you may need any of the following test equipment
to accurately calibrate the transmitter:
• Digital voltmeter or milliammeter with 0.02% accuracy or better
• HART hand-held communicator
• Calibration-standard pressure source with a 0.02% accuracy
• 250 ohm resistor with 0.01% accuracy or better.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
107
10— Calibration - Calibrating Analog Output Signal
Calibrating Analog Output Signal
You can calibrate the transmitter’s analog output circuit at its 0 and 100% levels by using the transmitter in
its constant-current source mode. It is not necessary to remove the transmitter from service.
The procedure in Table 45 shows the steps for calibrating the output signal for a transmitter in the analog
mode.
ATTENTION
You can calculate milliamperes of current from a voltage measurement by using the following
equation:
voltage
dc milliamps = 1000 x resistance
Table 45 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode
Step
1
Action
Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
See Figure 27 in Section 7 for sample test equipment hookup.
ATTENTION
Be sure the accuracy of the resistor is 0.01% or better for current measurements made by
voltage drop.
2
Starting from “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• D/A trim
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
When prompts appears, connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter (0.03% accuracy or
better) in loop to check readings. Press OK.
3
The following display prompts will appear:
• Setting field device output to 4mA. Press OK.
• Enter meter value. Key in meter value, then press ENTER.
• Field device output 4.000 mA equal to reference meter?
1 Yes
2 No
−
−
If not equal, select No, press ENTER, then key in new meter value. (Returns to “Enter
meter value” prompt until field device output equals reference meter.)
If equal, select Yes, press ENTER.
Go to Step 4.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
108
10— Calibration - Calibrating Range
Step
4
Action
The following display prompts will appear:
• Setting field device output to 20mA. Press OK.
• Enter meter value. Key in meter value, then press ENTER.
• Field device output 20.000 mA equal to reference meter?
1 Yes
2 No
−
−
If not equal, select No, press ENTER, then key in new meter value. (Returns to “Enter
meter value” prompt until field device output equals reference meter.)
If equal, select Yes, press ENTER.
Prompt notifies you that the field device will be returned to its original output.
Calibrating Range
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter has two-point calibration. This means when you calibrate two points in the
range, all the points in that range adjust to that calibration.
The procedure in Table 46 shows the steps for calibrating a differential pressure (DP) type transmitter to a
range of 0 to 200 inH2O for example purposes. This procedure assumes that the transmitter is removed
from the process and located in a controlled environment.
ATTENTION
You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0.02% or better to do a range
calibration. Note that we factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of water
ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2˚F (4˚C).
Table 46 Calibrating Measurement Range
Step
1
Action
Connect power supply and communicator to signal terminals on transmitter’s terminal block.
Connect precision pressure source to high pressure side of DP type transmitter.
See Figure 39 for typical communicator, power supply, and pressure source hookup for
calibration.
2
Turn on power supply and allow transmitter to stabilize its operation.
3
Turn on communicator.
4
From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Correct Input LRV
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing so, press OK.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
109
10— Calibration - Calibrating Range
Step
Action
5
When prompted, adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to LRV (0%), then press OK.
6
When pressure is stable, press OK. When prompted, remove pressure.
7
Choose Correct Input URV.
8
When prompted, adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to URV (100%), then press
OK.
9
When pressure is stable, press OK. When prompted, remove pressure.
ST 3000 HART
+
TEST
- SIGNAL +
+ 24Vdc
Power
- Supply
250 Ω
Low
Pressure
Head
DVM
Dead Weight
Tester
or
Precision
Pressure Source
Communicator
NOTE: Polarity of communicator
connection does not matter.
Figure 39 Typical Range Calibration Hookup
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
110
10— Calibration - Resetting Calibration
Resetting Calibration
Background
Every ST 3000 transmitter is factory-characterized. The characterization process calculates a mathematical
model of the performance of the transmitter’s sensors and stores that data in the transmitter’s memory.
Small residual errors result from the sensor data acquisition and modeling process. These errors can be
eliminated through calibration, using either a zero offset or a span correction.
A Corrects Reset returns the zero and span calibration factors to their default values. The transmitter
calculates its output based on the characterization equation alone, without any compensation for the
residual errors.
A typical zero offset correction is less than 0.1 inches of water (based on a 400 inH2O range) and a typical
span correction is less than 0.2% regardless of the range of calibration (down to the point where
specification turndown begins). Typical performance of a 400 inH2O transmitter with Corrects Reset can
be expressed as:
Accuracy = 0.2% + (0.1”/span”) • 100%
By calibrating the zero, the typical performance will be 0.2% or better.
For transmitter ranges other than 400”, the initial zero offset will be scaled by the ratio of the Upper
Range Limit to 400. For example, for a 100 psi transmitter, the initial zero offset can be expressed by:
0.1” • 2768/400 = 0.7” or 0.025 psi.
Please note that these are typical values, not hard specifications.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 47 shows how to reset calibration data to default values in a transmitter using the
communicator.
Table 47 Resetting Calibration Data
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
2
From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Calibration
• Reset Corrects
3
When prompted, remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
Prompt notifies you that a Reset Corrects is about to occur. Press OK.
When message “Reset Corrects OK” appears, press OK.
Previous calibration “CORRECTS” are removed and calibration is reset to default values.
4
6/05
When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
111
-
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
112
11— Troubleshooting - Introduction
11— Troubleshooting
Introduction
About this section
This section identifies diagnostic messages that may appear in the communicator and describes what they
mean. An interpretation of diagnostic messages is given and suggestions of the possible cause and
corrective action for each message. Procedures are provided for running a status check.
This section includes these topics.
A summary of the different diagnostic message categories that can be displayed by the communicator.
A description of the diagnostic messages and a recommended action to correct the condition or fault.
Troubleshooting Overview
Diagnostics
The communicator and ST 3000 transmitter are constantly running internal diagnostics to monitor the
functions and status of the control loop and their communications link.
When a diagnostic failure is detected, a corresponding message is generated for the communicator display.
Troubleshooting tool
Your primary troubleshooting tool is using the communicator for status messages and then interpreting the
diagnostic messages. You should also use the communicator to verify the transmitter’s configuration data
and check to be sure that your process is operating correctly.
To access transmitter diagnostics
You access the transmitter diagnostics starting at the “Online” menu of the communicator.
You then select:
Device setup
Diag/Service
Device status
The Device status menu appears.
ST3000:PT 3011
Device status
1
2
HELP
Critical
Non-Critical
SAVE
HOME
Select “Critical” or “Non-Critical” to view the status of the transmitter’s diagnostics. Device status
diagnostics are shown as either ON (in alarm) or OFF (no alarm).
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
113
11— Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Summary
The diagnostic messages can be grouped into one of these three categories:
Critical Failures
Non-Critical Failures
Communication Errors
A description of the messages in each category is given in the following paragraphs.
Critical failures
Table 48 summarizes the critical communicator status message displays. A critical failure drives the
transmitter’s output to its failsafe direction—upscale or downscale.
Table 48 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures
Message
Description
INVALID DATABASE
Database corrupted upon power-up.
CHAR PROM FAULT
Characterization PROM failure.
SUSPECT INPUT
Input pressure may be incorrect
DAC DIODE FAULT
Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) fault
NVM FAULT
Transmitter Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) fault
RAM FAULT
Transmitter Random Access Memory (RAM) fault
PROM FAULT
Transmitter Programmable Read Only Memory
(PROM) fault
PAC FAULT
Currently not implemented.
Once a critical fault has been corrected, you must clear the critical status from the transmitter. See Clearing
Critical Status later in this section.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
114
11— Troubleshooting - Diagnostic Messages
Non-critical failures
Table 49 summarizes the non-critical communicator status message displays. All communicator functions
remain operational during a non-critical failure.
Table 49 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures
Message
Description
SENSOR OVER TEMP
Meter body temperature is too high.
EXCESS ZERO CORR
Zero calibration value is too large (shift is larger
than characterization).
EXCESS SPAN CORR
SPAN correction factor is outside the acceptable
limits for accurate operation.
IN OUTPUT MODE
Transmitter is operating as current source.
M.B. OVERLOAD OR
Input pressure is more than two times greater
than the Upper Range Limit of the transmitter.
METERBODY FAULT
CORRECTS RESET
Must recalibrate transmitter to attain required
accuracy.
NO DAC TEMP COMP
No temperature compensation data exists for
calculations
Other error messages that may appear due to noncompatability of communicator software or transmitter
communication mode.
Message
Description
NOTICE: Upgrade 275 software to access new
Xmtr functions. Continue with old description?
You have connected to a device that has a newer
revision of device description than what is in the
communicator.
In multidrop mode
The transmitter poll address is not 0 (zero). You
have tried to change the analog output of a
transmitter that is in multidrop mode.
Communication errors
Table 50 summarizes the message displays associated with communication errors. All communicator
functions are disabled when a communication error occurs.
Table 50 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors
Message
6/05
Description
Device Disconnected
Communication with a device has been
interrupted.
No Device Found
Communicator was unable to establish
communications with any device upon power-up.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
115
11— Troubleshooting - Interpreting Messages
Interpreting Messages
Most of the diagnostic messages that can be displayed on the communicator are listed in alphabetical order
in Table 51 along with a description and suggested action to be taken.
Table 51 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table
Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
Char PROM Fault
Characterization PROM is not
functioning correctly.
Replace meter body.
Corrects Reset
All calibration “CORRECTS”
were deleted and data was
reset to default values.
Recalibrate transmitter.
See Section 10.
DAC Diode Fault
Digital to Analog Converter
(DAC) fault.
Replace electronics module (PWA).
Device Disconnected
Previously established
communication with a
transmitter has been lost. Could
be a transmitter or loop failure.
• Try communicating again.
Electronic Fault
Electronics module is not
functioning properly.
Replace electronics module. Do not
SAVE data.
Excess Span Corr
SPAN correction factor is
outside acceptable limits. Could
be that transmitter was in output
mode.
• Check input pressure and be
• Check that transmitter’s loop
integrity has been maintained,
that communicator is connected
properly, and that loop
resistance is at least 250Ω.
sure that it matches calibrated
range value.
• Check meter body.
• Do a URV CORRECT
procedure.
Excess Zero Corr
ZERO correction factor is
outside acceptable limits. Could
be that INPUT was incorrect or
transmitter was in output mode
during a CORRECT procedure.
• Check input pressure and be
sure that it matches calibrated
range value.
• Check meter body.
• Do an LRV CORRECT
procedure.
In multidrop mode
The transmitter poll address is
not 0 (zero). You have tried to
change the analog output of a
transmitter that is in multidrop
mode.
Change “HART mode” of
transmitter to analog by changing
poll address to 0.
In Output Mode
Transmitter is operating as a
current source.
Exit output mode (Loop test)-.
Perform Master reset, (or cycle
power).
Table continued on next page ⇒
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
116
11— Troubleshooting - Interpreting Messages
Message
Possible Cause
Transmitter database was
incorrect at power-up.
Invalid Database
What to Do
• Try communicating again.
• Verify database configuration,
Manually update non-volatile
memory with each parameter.
Pressure input is two times
greater than URL of transmitter.
M.B. Overload
OR
Meterbody Fault
• Check range and, if required,
replace transmitter with one that
has a wider range.
• Meter body may have been
damaged. Check the transmitter
for accuracy and linearity.
Replace meter body and
recalibrate, if needed.
No DAC Temp Comp
No temperature compensation
data exists for calculations.
Effect will be minor degradation of
ambient temperature influence
specifications. Replace electronics
module (PWA).
No Device Found
No response from transmitter.
Could be transmitter or loop
failure.
• Try communicating again.
NOTICE: Upgrade 275
software to access new
Xmtr functions. Continue
with old description?
You have connected to a device
that has a newer revision of
device description than what is
in the communicator.
Get updated device description for
the transmitter installed in the
communicator.
NVM Fault
Transmitter’s nonvolatile
memory fault.
Replace electronics module (PWA).
PAC Fault
Currently not implemented.
Nothing.
PROM Fault
Transmitter Programmable
Read Only Memory (PROM)
fault
Replace electronics module (PWA).
RAM Fault
Transmitter Random Access
Memory (RAM) fault.
Replace electronics module (PWA).
Sensor Over Temp
Meter body temperature is too
high. Accuracy and life span
may decrease if it remains high.
Take steps to insulate meter body
from temperature source.
Suspect Input
Input data seems wrong. Could
be a process problem, but it
could also be a meter body or
PWA problem.
• Put transmitter in output mode.
• Check that transmitter’s loop
integrity has been maintained,
that communicator is connected
properly, and that loop
resistance is at least 250Ω.
Note: You can continue
communicating with the transmitter,
but will not have access to full
transmitter functions.
Diagnostic messages should
identify where problem is. If no
other diagnostic message is
given, condition is most likely
meter body related.
• Check installation and replace
meter body if condition persists.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
117
11— Troubleshooting - Clearing Critical Status
Clearing Critical Status
After a critical failure has been diagnosed and corrected the critical status must be cleared from the
transmitter. This can be done by performing a master reset using the communicator.
A master reset causes a hardware reset of the transmitter, which actually is the same as cycling the power to
the transmitter.
Table 52 outlines the steps for resetting the transmitter.
Table 52 Resetting the Transmitter
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
2
From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Diag/Service
• Master reset
3
When prompted, remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK.
Prompt notifies you that a Master Reset is about to occur. Press OK.
When message “Master reset OK” appears, press OK.
Previous calibration “CORRECTS” are removed and calibration is reset to default values.
4
6/05
When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
118
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
12— Parts List
Replacement Parts
About this section
All individually saleable parts for the various transmitter models are listed in this section. Some parts are
illustrated for identification. Parts are identified and listed in the corresponding tables as follows:
All individually saleable parts are indicated in each figure by key number callout. For example: 1, 2, 3, and
so on.
All parts that are supplied in kits are indicated in each figure by key number callout with the letter “K”
prefix. For example: K1, K2, K3, and so on.
Parts denoted with a “†” are recommended spares. See Table 64 for summary list of recommended spare
parts.
Figure 40 shows major parts for a given model with reference to parts list figures.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
119
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
ST 3000 Release 300
Electronic Housing Assembly: See Figures 42 and 43
Meter Bodies
DP
Models
STD110
STD120
STD125
STD130
STD170
STD904
STD924
STD930
STD974
See
Figure
44
44
44
44
44
44,45
44,45
44,45
44,45
Flange
Mounted
Models
STF128
STF132
STF12F
STF13F
STF14F
STF924
STF932
STF92F
STF93F
Single Head
GP Models
STG140
STG170
STG180
See
Figure
46
46
46
Single Head
AP Models
STA122
STA140
STA922
STA940
See
Figure
46
46
46
46
See
Figure
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Dual Head
GP Models
STG944
STG974
See
Figure
47
47
Remote Diaphragm Seal
Models
STR12D
LGP Models
STR13D
STR14G
STR14A
STR17G
STR93D
STR94G
Attention: No replacement meter body is
available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models.
High
Temperature
Models
STG14T
STF14T
LGP/LAP
See
Models
STG14L
STG17L
STG18L
STG90L
STG94L
STG97L
STG98L
STA12L, 92L
STA14L, 94L
Figure
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
Flush Mount
GP Models
STG93P
See
Figure
49
See
Figure
51
51
Figure 40 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
120
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
1
3
Angle
Mounting
Bracket
Flat
Mounting
Bracket
2
4
Figure 41 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.
Table 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.
Key
No.
Part Number
1
30752770-003
Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount
2
30752770-004
Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G
3
51196557-001
Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush Mount
4
51196557-002
Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G
6/05
Description
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
Quantity
Per Unit
121
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
4
2
6
1
K1
5
Figure 42 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End.
1
K1
3/K2
Figure 43 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
122
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 54 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 42 and Figure 43
Key
No.
Part Number
1
30756961-503
End Cap
1
2
30756996-503
End Cap, meter
1
3
51205897-501†
51404078-502†
Terminal assembly without lightning protection
Terminal assembly with lightning protection
1
4
51309389-501
51309389-502
51309389-503
Local Zero and Span Adjust Only
Local Smart Meter Only
Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust
1
5
51309397-502
Electronics Module Assembly (PWA)
1
6
51204038-001
Retaining Clip
1
7
30756997-501
Analog meter
1
K1
30757503-001†
Electronics housing seals kit (includes O-rings)
K2
51197425-001
Terminal assembly without lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)
Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)
51197425-002
Not
Shown
30757504-001
K2
K3
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Electronics housing hardware kit, DP/I, GP/I, LGP/I (includes screws,
gasket, plate, washers, cover terminal, and spacers)
K4
K1
K3
K2
K7
K3
K1
K2
K1
K5
K3
K6
1
K6
K5
K8
K1
Figure 44 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924
& STD930 C, D, G, H, K, and L and STD974
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
123
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 55 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 44.
Key
No.
1
Description
Part Number
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 100 replacement meter body without heads
1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body without heads
1
30757104-001
Adapter, meter body to electronics housing
1
30753790-001
Carbon steel bolts and nuts kit
Not Shown
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
4
K4
Nut, hex, metric, M12, process heads
4
K8
Bolt, hex head, metric, M12, 90mm lg., process heads
4
2
30753791-002
A286 SS (NACE) bolts and 302/304 SS (NACE) nuts kit
Not Shown
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
4
K4
Nut, hex, metric, M12, process heads
4
K8
Bolt, hex head, metric, M12, 90mm lg., process heads
4
30753785-001
St. steel vent/drain and plug kit
K1
Pipe plug
4
K2
Vent plug (all except model STD110)
2
K3
Vent bushing (all except model STD110)
2
30753787-001
Monel vent/drain and plug kit
K1
Pipe plug
4
K2
Vent plug (all except model STD110)
2
K3
Vent bushing (all except model STD110)
2
30753786-001
Hastelloy C vent/drain and plug kit
K1
Pipe plug
4
K2
Vent plug (all except model STD110)
2
K3
Vent bushing (all except model STD110)
2
30753788-003†
Process head gasket kit (PTFE material)
30753788-004†
Process head gasket kit for (Viton material)
K6
Head gasket [For gasket only: 30756445-501 (PTFE, quantity 12) or
30749274-501 (6 Viton head O-rings and 6 Vition flange adapter O-rings)]
6
K7
O-ring
3
K9
Gasket, flange adapter (for gasket only: 30679622-501, 6 Teflon; or
30749274-002, 6 Viton)
6
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
124
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
Description
Part Number
Quantity
Per Unit
Optional Flange Adapter Kits (two heads) - Not Shown
30754419-002
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-004
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-018
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with 316 st. steel bolts)
30754419-020
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapters with 316 st. steel bolts)
Not Shown
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
4
K11
Gasket, flange adapter
2
K10
Flange adapter
2
K12
Filter screen
2
K9
30754419-003
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-019
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st. steel bolts)
Not Shown
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., optional flange adapter
4
K11
Gasket, flange adapter
2
K10
Flange adapter
2
K9
Process Head Kits (one head with PTFE head gasket)
30753908-001
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C head)
30753908-002
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C DIN head)
30753908-003
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head with side vent/drain)
30753908-004
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head with side vent/drain)
30753908-005
Process head assembly kit (Monel head)
30753908-009
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head without side vent/drain)
30753908-010
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel head without side vent/drain)
30753908-011
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel DIN head without side
vent/drain)
30753908-012
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head - model STD110 only)
30753908-013
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head - model STD110 only)
30753908-014
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel DIN head - model STD110
only)
30753908-015
Process head assembly kit (st. steel DIN head - model STD110 only)
K1
Pipe plug
2
K2
Vent plug
1
K3
Vent bushing
1
K5
Process head
1
K6
Gasket (PTFE), process head
1
K11
Gasket (PTFE), optional flange adapter
1
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
125
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
Description
Part Number
Quantity
Per Unit
Process Head Kits (one head with Viton head gasket)
30753908-101
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C head)
30753908-102
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C DIN head)
30753908-103
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head with side vent/drain)
30753908-104
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head with side vent/drain)
30753908-105
Process head assembly kit (Monel head)
30753908-109
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head without side vent/drain)
30753908-110
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel head without side vent/drain)
30753908-111
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel DIN head without side
vent/drain)
30753908-112
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head - model STD110 only)
30753908-113
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head - model STD110 only)
30753908-114
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel DIN head - model STD110
only)
30753908-115
Process head assembly kit (st. steel DIN head - model STD110 only)
K1
Pipe plug
2
K2
Vent plug
1
K3
Vent bushing
1
K6
Gasket (Viton), process head
1
K11
Gasket (PTFE), flange adapter
1
K5
Process head
1
K1
K2
K3
K3
K2
K1
1
Figure 45 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 & STD930 A, B, E, F, and J
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
126
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 56 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 45.
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate.
Series 900 replacement meter body without heads
1
K1
30757506-001
Head bolts carbon steel
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
30757507-001
Head bolts stainless steel/NACE
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
30757507-002
Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts
4
30757147-001†
Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, head gaskets
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30757147-002
Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, head
gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30757148-001
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head gaskets
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plugs, Gaskets
30757148-002
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head
gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plugs, Gaskets
30757149-001
Replacement heads Hastelloy
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head gaskets
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30757500-001
Replacement heads Monel
Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head gasket Teflon, Head gasket
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30757505-001†
Process Head Gasket Kit
Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Viton head
gaskets (30749274-004), and 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets
(30679622-501)
K2
K3
Optional Flange Adapter and Flange Adapter Gaskets - Not Shown
30679622-501
Flange adapter gaskets Teflon
6
6
30749274-502
Flange adapter gaskets Viton
30754419-002
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-018
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
K9
Not Shown
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
4
K11
Not Shown
Gasket, flange adapter
2
K10
Not Shown
Flange adapter
2
K12
Not Shown
Filter screen
2
30754419-003
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-019
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Not Shown
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., optional flange adapter
4
K9
K11
Not Shown
Gasket, flange adapter
2
K10
Not Shown
Flange adapter
2
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
127
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
K2
K4
2
1
K3
K1
Figure 46 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body
Table 57 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 46.
Key No.
2
1
Part Number
See Table 58
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Process head (GP/AP models)
1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 100 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models)
1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models)
1
30754154002†
Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except
STG180 (3 sets)
30754154003†
Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body (3
sets)
K2
O-ring
3
K3
Gasket, Teflon [for gasket only - 30756445-502 (narrow profile L.P), or
30756445-503 (STG180)
6
Gasket, Viton [for gasket only - 30756445-504 (narrow profile L.P), or
30756445-505 (STG180)
6
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
128
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key No.
Part Number
Description
30753792-001
Quantity
Per Unit
Bolts & nuts kit, all models - narrow profile (carbon steel)
K1
Nut, hex, metric, M8 carbon steel
4
K4
Bolt, hex head, metric, M8, 50 mm long
4
30753793-002
A286 SS (NACE) Bolts & 304 SS (NACE) nuts kit, all models - narrow
profile
K1
Nut, hex, 5/16 (304 stainless steel)
4
K4
Bolt, hex head, 5/16-18
4
30753793-003
Process Head Bolting 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts. Contains:
K1
5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Heavy Hex Nuts
4
K4
5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Hex Cap Screw
4
Table 58 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for
Narrow Profile Meter Body
Material
6/05
Fitting Size
Models: STA122, STA140,
STG140, STG170, STG180,
STA922, STA940
Carbon steel (Series 100)
9/16 - 18UNF-2B
30755124-001
Stainless steel (Series 100)
9/16 - 18UNF-2B
30755124-002
Carbon steel
1/2 in NPT
30755124-005
Stainless steel
1/2 in NPT
30755124-006
Monel
1/2 in NPT
30755124-008
Hastelloy C
1/2 in NPT
30755124-007
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
129
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
K1
K2
K3
K2
K1
1
Figure 47 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies.
Table 59 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 47.
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body without heads (GP models)
1
K1
30757506-001
Head bolts carbon steel, 3/8-inch
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
30757507-001
Head bolts stainless steel/NACE, 3/8-inch
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
30757507-002
Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts
4
30757501-001
Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket
30757501-002
Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head without side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket
30757502-001
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30757502-002
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30756941-005
Stainless steel blind reference head (HR option)
K2
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
130
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
K3
Description
Part Number
30757505-001†
Quantity
Per Unit
Process head gasket kit
Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Teflon flange
adapter gaskets (30679622-001), 6 Viton head gaskets (30749274-004)
Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown
K4
30679622-501
Flange adapter gaskets Teflon
6
30749274-502
Flange adapter gaskets Viton
6
Hexagonal Body
Round Body
Figure 48 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP/LAP Meter Body.
Table 60 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 48.
Key
No.
1
6/05
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 100 replacement meter body (LGP model)
1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body (LGP model)
1
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
131
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Figure 49 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body.
Table 61 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 49.
Key
No.
1
6/05
Description
Part Number
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body (Flush Mount model)
30756445-508
Gasket Kit (0-rings)
51204496-001
316L SS Mounting Sleeve Kit
51204497-001
Calibration Sleeve Kit
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
Quantity
Per Unit
1
132
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
1
Extended Flange Design
Pseudo Flange Design
Figure 50 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
133
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 62 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 50.
Key
No.
1
Description
Part Number
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 100 replacement meter body
1
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Series 900 replacement meter body
1
30749372-005
O-ring seal
1
30749372-001
O-ring seal
1
Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown
30754419-006
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-008
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-022
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
30754419-024
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
K1
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg.
2
K2
Flange adapter
1
K3
Gasket
1
K4
Filter screen
1
30754419-007
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
30754419-023
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with 316 st. steel bolts)
K1
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg.
2
K2
Flange adapter
1
K3
Gasket
1
Housing seal kit
1
K5
6/05
30757503-001
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
134
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
1
1
Sanitary Seal
Small Flange
NPT
Figure 51 High Temperature Meter Body.
Table 63 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 51.
Key
No.
1
Part Number
Specify complete
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Description
Series 100 replacement meter body
Quantity
Per Unit
1
Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket
51204982-001
Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
51204982-003
Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ SS NACE. hardware)
51204982-002
Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Hastelloy Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
51204984-001
Gasket GP/I (includes Teflon gasket and Viton O-ring)
Flange Adapter - Not Shown
6/05
51204983-001
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-002
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-017
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-018
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-003
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-004
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-005
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-006
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-019
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-020
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-007
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
135
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Key
No.
6/05
Part Number
Description
51204983-008
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-013
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-014
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-023
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-024
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-015
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-016
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-009
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-010
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-021
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-022
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-011
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-012
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-025
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-026
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-037
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-038
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-027
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-028
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-029
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-030
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-039
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-040
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-031
Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-032
Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-033
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-034
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-041
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
51204983-042
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
51204983-035
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
51204983-036
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
Quantity
Per Unit
136
12— Parts List - Replacement Parts
Table 64 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts.
Reference
Part Number
Description
Figure
Nmbr.
Key
Nmbr.
Spares for
1-10
Units
10100
Units
1001000
Units
Electronics Housing Assembly
Figs 42 and 43
51309397-502
Electronics Module Assembly
42
5
1
1-2
2-4
30757503-001
Series 100/900 housing seal kit
42, 43
K1
1
1-2
2-4
51205897-501
Series 100/900 terminal assembly without lightning
protection
43
3/K2
1
1
1-2
51404078-502
Series 100/900 terminal assembly with lightning
protection
1
1-4
4-10
1
1-2
2-4
Process head gasket kit
45, 47
K3
30757505-001
For STD924-A, B, E, F, and J; STD930-A, B, E, F,
and J; STG944; STG974 models
Teflon and Viton
44
K7
30753788-003
30753788-004
For all other Series 100 DP and STD924-C, D, G, H,
K, and L; STD930-C, D, G, H, K, and L; and STD974
models
Teflon
Viton
46
K1
30754154-002
For STA122, STA140, STA922, STA940, STG140,
and STG170
Teflon and Viton
30754154-003
For STG180
46
K3
Meter Body
Specify
Series 100/900 DP Models
44
1
complete model
Series 900 DP Models
44, 45
1
number from
Series 100/900 GP/AP Models
46
1
nameplate plus
Series 900 GP Dual Head Model
47
1
R300
Series 100/900 LGP/LAP and Series 900 AP Models
48
1
Series 900 Flush Mount Models
49
1
Series 100/900 Flange Mount Models
50
1
Series 100 High Temperature Models
51
1
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
137
13— Reference Drawings - Wiring Diagrams
13— Reference Drawings
Wiring Diagrams
Contents
These wiring diagrams are included in numerical order behind this section for wiring reference.
External Wiring Diagrams
ST 3000 HART
Description
Drawing number
Release 300
For intrinsically safe application (FM)
51205784
Series 100, 900
For intrinsically safe application (CENELEC)
51204215
Transmitters
For intrinsically safe application (CSA)
51450806
Dimension Drawings
Dimension drawings for individual transmitter models are available and are listed in this manual. If you
need a copy of a drawing, please determine the appropriate drawing number and contact your Honeywell
representative to obtain a copy.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
137
13— Reference Drawings - Wiring Diagrams
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
138
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Introduction
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference
Introduction
About this section
This section describes the integral smart meter options available with the ST 3000 Release 300 HART
transmitter.
Procedures are given for setting range values of the transmitter using the smart meter pushbuttons.
You can use the meter pushbuttons or the HART communicator to set up the smart meter display to
indicate transmitter PV output.
Typical smart meter indications are given as well as examples and descriptions of possible error codes
displayed on the smart meter.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
139
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Introduction
Smart meter option
Depending upon your transmitter model, you can equip the ST 3000 transmitter with the Smart Meter
option (option SM). This new integral smart meter is designed for ST 3000 Release 300 Transmitters and
provides functionality not available with other smart meter designs.
The smart meter provides an LCD local interface that displays both analog and digital indications of the
transmitter output and can be configured to display pressure in user-selected engineering units.
There are three meter option types:
Meter option
Description
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
Smart Meter with local Zero and Span
Adjustments – Features smart meter LCD
interface, pushbuttons for setting engineering
units and lower range/upper range values, and
zero/span adjustments.
UNITS
SET
ZERO
LOWER
VALUE
Local Zero and Span Adjustments only –
Provides pushbuttons to make zero and span
adjustments.
SPAN
ZERO
Smart Meter only – Features smart meter LCD
interface, pushbuttons for setting engineering
units and lower range/upper range values.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Note: The Model STD110 does not support local zero and span adjustments.
Smart Meter Set up
The smart meter can be set up to display pressure in a number of user-selected engineering units or even
custom units, if required. The meter display set up is part of the transmitter configuration database and can
be performed when configuring the transmitter. You can use either the HART communicator or the
pushbuttons on the front of the meter to set up the smart meter display. The procedures for either method
of meter set up are provided in this appendix.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
140
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Smart Meter Display
Smart Meter Display
Display description
Figure A-1 shows a smart meter display with all its indicators and segments lit for reference. Descriptions
of the meter indicators are listed in Table A-1. Table A-2 shows the smart meter with the pushbuttons
highlighted and a brief description of each pushbutton. The pushbuttons are used for setting up the smart
meter display and making zero and span adjustments.
17-Segment Bargraph
(0 to 100%)
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
SPAN
Digital Readout
(-19990 to +19990)
ZERO
%
100
-18 8. 80
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
KNOWN VALUE
ANALOG
K
oF oC
%
FLOW
UNITS
SET
In H O
2
LOWER
GPH mmHg VALUE
GPM PSI A
Status Indicators
Engineering Unit
Indicators
K Multiplier Indicates digital readout
is multiplied by 1,000
Figure A-1 Smart Meter Display with All Indicators Lit.
Table A-1 Description of Smart Meter Display Indicators
Display Indicator
What It Means When Lit
17-Segment Bargraph
Gives a gross indication of the transmitter’s PV output from 0 to 100%.
Digital Readout
Gives an indication of the transmitter’s PV output in either percent of
span or actual engineering units. The display range is ±19,990,000 and
it is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible within
the limits of the display. A second decimal place expands the precision
of range values within ±19.99 to 1/100th of a unit.
%
Digital readout represents output in percent of span. This is the default
engineering units selection.
FLOW
Transmitter is configured for square root output conformity.
OUTPUT MODE
Transmitter is in its output mode and it is not sending a real PV signal.
CHECK STATUS
Transmitter in multidrop mode and showing a critical status or if
transmitter is in Analog mode, the transmitter has an output that is less
than –2.0% or greater than 106%.
Use the communicator to check transmitter’s status.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
141
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference -
Display Indicator
What It Means When Lit
KNOWN VALUE
The upper value or lower value being displayed has previously been
configured to the value shown.
ANALOG
Transmitter is in its analog mode. (When indicator is OFF, transmitter is
in multidrop mode)
K
Multiplies digital reading by 1,000. Turns on automatically when reading
exceeds 1999.
A
Transmitter is absolute pressure type. Digital readout represents
absolute values.
Engineering Units Indicators
Inches of Water
Gallons per hour
Gallons per minute
Millimeters of Mercury
Pounds per Square Inch
inH2O
GPH
GPM
MmHg
PSI
Selectable engineering units - Available as a stick-on label from
Honeywell drawing number 30756918-001.
Additional Engineering Units
(stick-on label not shown)
Kpa
Mpa
mbar
bar
g/cm2
Kg/cm2
mmH2O
inHg
mH2O
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Kilopascals
Megapascals
Millibar
Bar
Grams per Square Centimeter
Kilograms per Square Centimeter
Millimeters of Water
Inches of Mercury
Meters of Water
Table A-2 Smart Pushbutton Description
Smart Meter Pushbuttons
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
ZERO
Pushbutton
UPPER
VALUE
-18 8. 8 0
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
KNOWN VALUE
ANALOG
K
oF oC
%
FLOW
VAR SEL.
Not functional when installed with
ST 3000 transmitters.
SPAN
Selects Span range setting (URV).
ZERO
Selects Zero range setting.
UPPER VALUE
Selects upper display limit for custom or
flow engineering units.
UNITS SET
Selects engineering units for meter
display.
LOWER VALUE
Selects Lower display limit for custom or
flow engineering units.
UNITS
SET
In H O LOWER
2
VALUE
GPH mmHg
GPM PSI A
Function
Decrease pushbutton
Increase pushbutton
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
142
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Smart Meter Specifications
Smart Meter Specifications
Operating conditions and specifications
Before installing a transmitter equipped with a smart meter or installing the smart meter in an existing
transmitter, please note the specifications and operating limits of the meter in Table A-3.
Table A-3 Smart meter specifications.
Operating Conditions
Parameter
Rated
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
°F
°C
%RH
Extreme, Transportation and
Storage
–40 to 176
–40 to 80
–58 to 194
–50 to 90
10 to 90
0 to 100
Design
No error. Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution.
Accuracy
Display Resolution
Bargraph
Digital Readout
Display Update Rate
±3% of reading
±0.005 for ±19.99 reading range,
±0.05 for ±199.9 reading range,
±0.5 for ±1999 reading range,
±5 for ±19990 reading range,
±50 for ±199900 reading range,
±500 for ±1999000 reading range,
±5000 for ±19990000 reading range.
Shown as:
19.99
199.9
1999
19.99 K
199.9 K
1999 K
19990 K
Above 32°F (0°C): ½ second
@ or below 32°F (0°C): 1½ seconds
Meter Display at High and Low Temperature Extremes
The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are true in that no damage to the meter
will occur over these temperatures, however the readability of the LCD is affected if taken to these
temperature extremes:
• The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 °C (176 and 194 °F), rendering the
display unreadable. This effect is only temporary, and normally occurs at 90 °C (194 °F).
• At low temperatures, the update rate of the display is lengthened to 1.5 seconds due to the slower
response time of the display. At -20 °C (-4 °F) the display becomes unreadable due to slow response
of the LCD. This is also only temporary and normal readability will return when temperature returns
above -20 °C (-4 °F).
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
143
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
Local zero and span option
ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters are available with optional local zero and span adjustments. This option
is for applications that do not require a HART communicator nor digital integration with our TPS system.
About local adjustments
You must apply equivalent zero and span pressures to make the local zero and span adjustments. This is
similar to LRV correct and URV set using the HART communicator. We recommend that you calibrate the
transmitter before setting up the meter for custom engineering units.
The procedure in Table A-4 shows the steps for setting the range values to applied pressures using local
zero and span adjustments. See Figure A-2 for typical local adjustment setup details.
ATTENTION
All procedures in this manual assume a transmitter poll address of 0 (zero). See Section 6, for
information about poll address.
After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.
Table A-4 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments
Step
Action
1
Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from terminal block
side of electronics housing.
2
Observing polarity, connect a milliammeter across positive (+) and negative (–) TEST terminals.
ATTENTION
If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may use the
smart meter in place of the milliammeter.
3
Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from PWA side of electronics housing to expose
local zero and span assembly or smart meter with zero and span adjustments.
Examples – Local zero and span assembly, and Smart meter with zero and span adjustments.
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
SP AN
SP AN
%
100
UNITS
SE T
ZERO
ZERO
LOWER
VALUE
and
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
144
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
Step
4
Action
Turn ON transmitter power and let it warm up for a few minutes. Using an accurate pressure
source, apply desired zero equivalent pressure to transmitter.
ATTENTION
For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure to the high pressure head for positive
range values or vent both heads to atmosphere for zero. If zero is to equal a negative value,
apply the equivalent pressure to the low pressure head. For example, if zero is to equal –10
inH2O, you would apply 10 inH2O to the low pressure head and vent the high pressure head
for the zero adjustment.
5
Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA.
• If reading is less or greater than 4 mA, Then go to Step 6.
• If reading is correct, go to Step 7.
ATTENTION
If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may substitute
the smart meter readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with zero input pressure
applied assume that the meter reads 4 inH2O instead of 0 inH2O. In this case, the meter
reading is greater than 0 (or 4 mA).
6
d)
Press and hold ZERO button on local zero and span assembly or smart meter.
ATTENTION
The smart meter readings revert to the default unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the
error code Er0 appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that
does not support the local zero and span adjustments.
e)
Press Decrease
button once to complete this function.
The smart meter display goes blank for a 1/2 second and then returns reading 0%.
f) Check that milliammeter reading equals 4 mA and release ZERO button.
ATTENTION
If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you are not working with a model STD110
transmitter that ignores local adjustments. The smart meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the ZERO button.
If zero correction is + or – 5% of upper range limit, the CHECK STATUS indicator will be
displayed. If range setting is intentional, disregard status message.
7
Using an accurate pressure source, apply pressure equivalent to desired upper range value to
transmitter.
ATTENTION
For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure to the high pressure head and be sure
that the low pressure side is vented to atmosphere.
If the applied pressure produces an output of greater than 200%, the meter display will flash
O-L and the 200% value during this interim step.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
145
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting Range Values (Local Zero and Span)
Step
8
Action
Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA.
• If reading is not exactly 20 mA, Then go to Step 9.
• If reading is correct, go to Step 10.
ATTENTION
If you have the smart meter with local zero and span adjustment option, you may substitute
the smart meter readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with URV input pressure
applied, assume that the meter reads 396 inH2O instead of 400 inH2O. In this case, the
meter reading is less than 100% (or 20 mA).
9
a)
Press and hold SPAN button on local zero and span assembly or smart meter.
ATTENTION
The smart meter readings revert to the default unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the
error code Er0 appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that
does not support the local zero and span adjustments.
b)
Press Increase
button once to complete this function.
ATTENTION
If the error code Er4 appears, you are trying to set a SPAN value that is outside acceptable
limits for your transmitter. Readjust applied pressure to be within acceptable range limits and
repeat this procedure. The smart meter display goes blank for a 1/2 second and then returns
reading 100%.
c)
Check that milliammeter reading equals 20 mA and release SPAN button.
ATTENTION
If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you are not working with a model STD110
transmitter that ignores local adjustments. The smart meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the SPAN button.
6/05
10
Wait 30 seconds so that changes are copied to the transmitter’s non-volatile memory.
11
Remove applied pressure and turn OFF transmitter power.
12
Replace end-cap on PWA side of electronics housing and tighten lock.
13
Remove milliammeter from TEST terminals and replace end-cap and tighten lock.
14
Turn ON transmitter power and check smart meter reading, if applicable.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
146
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
ST 3000
+
- SIGNAL +
Power
Supply -
+
Receiver
250 ohm
+
TEST
-
Field
Terminals
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
SPAN
Smart Meter with
Local Zero and Span
installed on PWA side
of electronics housing
%
000
AN ALOG
ZERO
100
UNITS
SET
In H 2 O
LOWER
VALUE
Milliammeter
Figure A-2 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments.
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
The smart meter can be set to show the PV output in engineering units that are appropriate for your process
application. You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower
display limits settings for the smart meter’s digital readout using buttons on the face of the meter.
Using the Smart Meter
Follow these guidelines when configuring the smart meter:
If you initiate a command with the HART communicator at the same time a button is pressed on the smart
meter, the smart meter will respond to the command it receives last. In other words, the last command
wins.
In most cases, you can press and release a button for one-shot operation, or press and hold a button for
continuous, 1/2 second, repetitive operation.
Active setup field will begin to flash at one second rate if next action is not initiated within one second.
And, if no action is taken within 30 seconds, the setup function will time out and the meter will return to
its previous state.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
147
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration
Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the transmitter’s output to represent a
straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form. (See Section 6 for more
details on output conformity.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement, there are certain rules to
keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described in the
following paragraphs.
The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the smart
meter display.
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR, you can select only pressure
type engineering units. (See Table A-5.)
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT, you can select only
flow type engineering units GPM and GPH.
The percent and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity configuration.
Table A-5 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code
Smart Meter Code
*
†
6/05
Engineering Unit
Transmitter Output
Conformity
EU0
%
*
Linear or Square Root
EU1
in H2O
*
EU2
mmHg
*
EU3
PSI
*
EU4
kPa
†
EU5
MPa
†
EU6
mbar
†
EU7
bar
†
EU8
g/cm2
†
EU9
kg/cm2
†
EUA
mmH2O
†
EUB
inHg
†
EUC
mH2O
†
EUD
GPM
*
Square Root
EUE
GPH
*
Square Root
EUF
Custom
†
Linear or Square Root
Linear
These selections have indicators on smart meter display.
Use stick-on labels provided for other engineering units.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
148
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to
represent transmitter’s 0 to 100% output.
If you select pressure type engineering units, you cannot set the lower or upper display limits. These
values are automatically set when you select the engineering units.
You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is configured for SQUARE ROOT output
conformity. The lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) for a transmitter in square root mode and
cannot be changed.
You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you have selected custom engineering units
(EUF) and the transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR.
When setting the lower and upper display limits, if you let either the lower or upper display limit setting
time out (after thirty seconds), the meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous
settings. The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting, either
lower or upper, depending upon which limit you set first.
If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must reconfigure the smart meter as outlined in
Tables A-6, A-7 and A-8 or Table A-9. See also “Meter/transmitter interaction” in this appendix.
Selecting Engineering Units
The procedure in Table A-6 outlines the steps for selecting the desired engineering units for a smart meter
using its local adjustments on the face of the meter. You will be selecting the unit of measurement that
you want the smart meter to indicate during normal operation.
WARNING
When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not explosionproof.
Table A-6 Selecting Engineering Units
Step
Action
1
Loosen lock on meter end-cap and unscrew cap
from housing. Be sure transmitter power is ON.
2
Press UNITS SET button.
Result
Display shows code for current engineering units
setting.
VAR
UPPE R
SEL.
VALUE
0
%
EU 0
ANALOG
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
100
UNITS
%
SET
LOWER
VALUE
149
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
Action
3
Press Increase
key to call up next code or
Decrease
key to call up previous code. Repeat
this action until desired code is on display.
Result
Selection codes for engineering units
You can hold down the Increase or Decrease key
to scroll forward or backward through the codes.
VA R
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
%
0
ATTENTION
Remember that if transmitter is configured for
SQUARE ROOT output conformity the only valid
code selections are:
EU0 (%)
EUD (GPM)
EUE (GPH)
EUF (Custom)
100
EU 1
UNIT S
SE T
ANALOG
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
In H 2 O
LOWER
VALUE
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
EU0 = %*
EU1 = inH2O*
If transmitter is configured for LINEAR output
conformity EU0 (%) to EUC and EUF (CUSTOM)
are valid code selections.
EU2 = mmHg*
EU3 = PSI*
EU4 = KPa
EU5 = MPa
EU6 = mbar
EU7 = bar
EU8 = g/cm2
EU9 = Kg/cm2
EUA = mmH2O
EUB = inHg
EUC = mH2O
*These selections
have indicators on
the display.
EUD = GPM*
EUE = GPH*
EUF = Custom
4
Press UNITS SET button to lock in selected code.
ATTENTION
VAR
SEL.
If you select an invalid code according to the
selections in Step 3, the meter display will show
an error code Er1 for one second and then return
to the previous engineering units selection.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
0. 1 8
ANALOG
100
UNITS
SET
In H 2 O
LOWER
VALU E
Goes blank for 1/2 second and returns with
reading in engineering units
5
If selected engineering unit does not match one of
six unit indicators on meter, peel off matching
stick-on unit label from sheet (drawing number
30756918-001) and paste it in lower right hand
corner of meter.
Digital reading now
in engineering units
of inches of water
Use stick-on label for engineering units without
indicators on display.
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
100
1. 0 2
UNITS
SET
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Kg/cm2
Stick-on label
identifies selected
engineering units
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
150
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
Action
Result
6
If you selected Custom or Flow engineering units,
go to Tables A-7 and A-8 to set lower and upper
display limits for smart meter display.
Lower and upper display limits have not been set
for custom or flow engineering units.
VA R
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
U- L
UNITS
SET
FLOW
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
GPM
Setting Lower and Upper Display Values
The table below shows the restrictions on setting the display values for given engineering units and output
conformity selections.
Engineering
Output
Set
Units code
Conformity
Lower Display Value?
Upper Display Value?
EU0 through EUC
Linear
No (set automatically)
No (set automatically)
Square root
No (fixed at zero)
Yes
(Pressure type units)
EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF
(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom)
EUF
(Custom)
Use Table A-8
Linear
Yes
Yes
Use Table A-7
Use Table A-8
To set the lower and upper display limit values for the meter display perform the procedures in Tables A-7
and A-8. Also note that in each procedure you must:
First set the magnitude range for each display value. This enables the multiplier (K) on the display for
indicating larger ranges (greater than 19999 and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or
right depending on the precision you want to show for that value).
Next set the display value. This procedure sets the display limit of the meter to represent minimum and
maximum transmitter output (0% and 100 % output).
Note: Magnitude range and display values are set for both upper and lower (if applicable) display limits.
During normal operation the display range of the meter digital readout is ±19,990,000 and is automatically
ranged to provide the best precision possible for the digits available up to 1/100th of a unit.
ATTENTION
Please read through the entire procedure before beginning.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
151
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Setting Lower Display Values
The procedure in Table A-7 outlines the steps for setting the lower display limit to represent the 0 percent
(LRV) output of the transmitter.
ATTENTION
For example purposes, the procedures in Tables A-7 and A-8 assume that the lower value is
to be set at 0 and the upper value is to be set at 19,990,000 for a CUSTOM unit in a
transmitter with a LINEAR output, and the transmitter’s present output is exactly 50 percent.
Table A-7 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display
Step
Action
1
You have completed units selection in Table A-6
and U-L appears on the display. Press LOWER
VALUE button to initiate lower display limit setting
function.
Result
If lower limit display value was previously set,
KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
flashes in display.
ATTENTION
VA R
SEL.
This procedure is only applicable for Custom
(EUF) engineering unit selection in a transmitter
configured for LINEAR output conformity.
The lower display value for transmitters configured
for SQUARE ROOT output conformity is fixed at
zero (0.00) and cannot be changed.
2
Press LOWER VALUE button again within 5
seconds to access magnitude range setting.
Otherwise, meter exits limit setting function.
NOTE: Magnitude range enables the multiplier (K)
for indicating larger ranges and shifts the decimal
point of the digital display left or right depending
on which button is pushed. The display shows
largest positive number for given range selection
so you can select a range that is just larger than
the range to be set for best display precision.
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
0 .0 0
UNITS
SE T
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
KNOWN VALUE
Previously set
value flashes in
display and
indicator lights
Display shows magnitude range selection.
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
19 .99
ANALOG
100
UNITS
SE T
LOWER
VALUE
ATTENTION
The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the meter display limits. This selection does not
affect the normal operation of the meter. During normal operation, the display is automatically ranged to
provide the best precision possible.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
152
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
Action
3
Press Increase
button to shift the decimal point
to the right and increase the magnitude range or
Decrease
button to shift the decimal point to
the left and decrease the magnitude range.
Repeat this action until desired selection is on
display.
Result
Magnitude range selections.
VA R
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
Also you can hold the respective key to scroll
forward or backward through the selections.
%
19 .9 9
ANALOG
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
4
Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower
display value setting.
19.99
199.9
1999
19.99K*
199.9K*
1999K*
19990K*
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
*The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
below the digital
reading on the display.
Readout goes blank except for first active digit
which will be 0 unless lower value was set before.
VAR
UPPE R
SEL.
VALUE
0
%
0
ANALOG
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
153
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
5
Action
Press Increase
button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease
button to
select the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.
6
Result
First digit value setting.
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
%
0
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in first digit
and activate next active digit.
Press Increase
button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease
button to
select the previous digit value.
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
8
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in second
digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless lower value was set before.
9
Press Increase
button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease
button to
select the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.
VAR
UPPE R
SEL.
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in third digit
and activate next active digit.
VALUE
%
0 .0 0
ANALOG
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be BLANK unless lower value was set to 1 before.
11
Press Increase
button to set digit to 1 or
Decrease
button to set it to BLANK.
12
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in “1” digit
and activate sign segment.
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
Readout now displays sign segment which will be
BLANK for positive values unless lower value was
set for negative (–) values before.
6/05
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
Third digit value setting.
0
10
LOWER
VALUE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.
UNITS
SET
ANALOG
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless lower value was set before.
7
0
100
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
154
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
Action
13
Press Increase
button to set sign segment to
minus sign for negative values or Decrease
button to set it to BLANK. for positive values.
14
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in current
settings as lower display value limit.
Result
Sign segment setting.
VAR
VALUE
0
ATTENTION
For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR
output, you must set both lower and upper display
limits for values to take effect. If you let either the
lower or upper display limit time out (after 30
seconds), the meter discards both newly set
values and reverts back to the previously set
values.
UPPE R
SEL.
%
0 .0 0
ANALOG
Press to set sign
segment as
BLANK for
positive values
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Press to set sign
segment as minus
sign (-) for negative
values
• If you have not yet set the upper display limit value, the meter automatically enters the upper display
setting function after it displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table A-8.
• If you have already set the upper display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits
setting function for Custom engineering units in the transmitter. Meter returns to normal operation.
Setting Upper Display Values
The procedure in Table A-8 outlines the steps for setting the upper display limit to represent the 100
percent (URV) output of the transmitter.
ATTENTION
This procedure applies only for Flow units (GPM or GPH) in a transmitter configured for
SQUARE ROOT output conformity, or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for linear or
square root output conformity.
Table A-8 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display
Step
1
6/05
Action
Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper
display limit setting function.
Result
If upper limit display value was previously set,
KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
flashes in display.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
155
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
2
Action
Press UPPER VALUE button again within 5
seconds to access magnitude range setting.
Otherwise, meter exits limit setting function.
NOTE: Magnitude range enables the multiplier
(K) for indicating larger ranges and shifts the
decimal point of the digital display left or right
depending on which button is pushed. The
display shows largest positive number for given
range selection so you can select a range that is
just larger than the range to be set for best display
precision.
Result
Display shows magnitude range selection.
VAR
UPPE R
SEL.
VALUE
0
%
19 .99
100
UNITS
SET
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
ATTENTION
The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the display limits. This selection does not affect
the normal operation of the meter. During normal operation, the display is automatically ranged to provide
the best precision possible.
3
Press Increase
button to shift the decimal point
to the right and increase the magnitude range or
Decrease
button to shift the decimal point to
the left and decrease the magnitude range.
Repeat this action until desired selection is on
display. For example purposes only, largest
range 19990K is selected in this procedure.
Magnitude range selections with largest range
selected.
V AR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
Also you can hold the respective key to scroll
forward or backward through the selections.
%
19 9 90
ANALOG
K
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
4
Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper
value setting.
19.99
199.9
1999
19.99K*
199.9K*
1999K*
19990K*
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
*The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
below the digital
reading on the display.
Readout goes blank except for first active digit
which will be 0 unless upper value was set before.
VAR
UPPE R
SEL.
VALUE
0
%
00
ANALOG
K
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
100
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
156
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
5
Action
Press Increase
button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease
button to
select the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on display
– use 9 for example purposes.
Result
First digit value setting is set to 9.
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
%
0
90
100
SET
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
6
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in first digit
and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless upper value was set before.
7
UNITS
VAR
UPPE R
SEL.
VALUE
%
0
0 90
Press Increase
button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease
button to
select the previous digit value.
100
UNITS
SET
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.
8
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in second
digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be zero unless upper value was set before.
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
0 9 90
ANALOG
K
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
100
UNITS
SE T
LOWER
VALUE
157
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
9
Action
Press Increase
button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease
button to
select the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on display
– use 9 for example purposes.
Result
Next digit value setting is set to 9.
VA R
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
10
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in third digit
and activate next active digit.
%
9 9 90
LOWER
VALUE
K
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press Increase
button to set digit to 1 or
Decrease
button to set it to BLANK.
“1” digit value setting is set to 1.
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
1 99 90
100
LOWER
VALUE
K
Press to set "1"
digit as BLANK
12
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in “1” digit
and activate sign segment.
13
Press Increase
button to set sign segment to
minus sign for negative values or Decrease
button to set it to BLANK. for positive values.
UNITS
SET
ANALOG
Press to set "1"
digit as 1
Readout now displays sign segment which will be
BLANK for positive values unless upper value was
set for negative (–) values before.
VA R
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
Sign segment
is BLANK for
positive values
and minus sign
for negative
values
6/05
UNI TS
SET
ANALOG
Readout now displays next active digit which will
be BLANK unless upper value was set to 1 before.
11
100
%
199 90
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
ANALOG
K
100
UNIT S
SET
LOWER
VALUE
158
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Step
Action
Result
14
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in current
settings as upper display value and return to
previous display. Upper display limit setting is now
complete.
Display goes blank for a 1/2 second and returns to
display readout equal to 50% output.
For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR
output, you must set both lower and upper display
limits for values to take effect. If you let either the
lower or upper display limit time out (after 30
seconds), the meter discards both newly set
values and reverts back to the previously set
values.
In this example, readout is 9, 990,000 CUSTOM
unit for 50% display range of 0 to 19,990,000
CUSTOM for transmitter with LINEAR output.
VAR
UPPE R
SEL.
VALUE
0
%
99 90
ANALOG
K
100
UNIT S
SET
LOWER
VALUE
• If you have not yet set the lower display limit value for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for
LINEAR output mode, the meter automatically enters the lower display setting function after it displays
previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table A-7, Step 3.
• If you have already set the lower display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits
setting function for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode. Meter returns to
normal operation.
• If you have just set the upper display limit for Flow unit or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for
SQUARE ROOT output mode, this completes the limit setting function. Meter returns to normal
operation.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
159
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator
Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator
Using the Hart Communicator to Configure the Smart Meter Display
You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower limit settings
for the smart meter’s digital readout using the HART communicator. Use the procedure in Table A-9 to
setup the smart meter display with the HART communicator.
Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration
Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the transmitter’s output to represent a
straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form. (See Section 6 in this
User manual for more details.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement, there are certain rules to
keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described in the
following paragraphs. Refer to Table A-5 also for meter set up restrictions.
1.
The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the
smart meter display.
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR, you can select only pressure
type engineering units. (See Table A-5.)
When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT, you can select only
flow type engineering units GPM and GPH.
The percent (%) and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity
configuration.
2. Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to
represent transmitter’s 0 to 100% output. The table below shows the restrictions on setting display
values for given engineering units and output conformity selections.
Engineering
Output
Set
Units code
Conformity
Lower Display Value?
Upper Display Value?
EU0 through EUC
Linear
No (set automatically)
No (set automatically)
Square root
No (fixed at zero)
Yes
Linear
Yes
Yes
(Pressure type units)
EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF
(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom)
Custom
3. If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must reconfigure the smart meter as outlined in
Table A-9. See also “Meter/transmitter interaction” in this appendix.
ATTENTION
After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
160
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator
Table A-9 Smart meter display setup using HART communicator
Step
Action
1
Connect communicator across loop wiring and turn it on.
2
From “Online” menu, choose the following menu selections:
• Device setup
• Basic setup
• Local meter
3
The “Local meter” display will appear.
ST3000:PT 3011
Local meter
1
2
HELP
Installed
Units
SAVE
Yes
%
HOME
ATTENTION
You can set up the smart meter display using this procedure even if the meter is not installed
in the transmitter.
4
Determine whether the current engineering unit (Units) for the meter display is correct for your
process application.
• If it is correct, press HOME (end of procedure).
• If not, determine the desired engineering unit for the meter display from Table A-5.
Also determine the correct output conformity selection (Linear or Square Root) for the
transmitter output and meter EU. See Table A-5 for EU and output conformity selections.
5
To change output conformity:
Press the left arrow key to show the “Basic setup” display.
6
Scroll down to highlight “PV xfer fnctn” (Output conformity) and select it by pressing the right
arrow key. The “Transfer function” display appears.
Select the correct Transfer function (Linear or Square root) and press ENTER. Press SEND to
download change to the transmitter.
7
You will be warned that pressing OK will change device output. Press OK.
8
When prompted, return the loop to automatic control and press OK.
The communicator will return to the “Basic setup” display.
9
To change engineering units for meter display:
Scroll up to highlight “Local meter” and select it by pressing the right arrow key.
10
6/05
Select “Units” by pressing the number 2 key.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
161
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Setting smart meter display using the HART communicator
Step
11
Action
Scroll through the list of engineering units using the up and down arrow keys and select the
desired units, then press ENTER. The available units are listed below for reference.
%
mbar
mH2O
inH2O
bar
gal/min
mmHg
g/Sqcm
gal/h
psi
kg/Sqcm
Custom
kPa
mmH2O
MPa
inHg
Note: Be sure that the engineering unit that is selected is compatible with the output
conformity selection in Table A-5.
12
Press SEND to download change to the transmitter.
13
If “Upper” and “Lower” appear on the screen, select Upper and enter the upper limit value for
the meter display. Press ENTER.
Select Lower and enter the lower limit value for the meter display. Press ENTER.
Note: If square root output conformity is selected, the lower display limit is fixed at zero and
cannot be changed.
14
Press SEND to download changes to the transmitter.
ATTENTION
If an error message appears,
“Invalid unit occurred writing Units. Restore device value?” or
“Invalid meter option occurred writing Lower. Restore device value?”
You have tried to download an invalid parameter for the meter display.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
162
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Typical smart meter indications
Typical smart meter indications
Table A-10 summarizes typical smart meter indications. Note that other combinations of status messages
are possible.
Table A-10 Summary of Typical Smart Meter Indications.
Meter Indication
What It Means
Meter Indication
What It Means
No power
applied.
%
0
0
%
20 0
ANALOG
100
%
0
100
100
- - Normal display
for transmitter in
Analog mode with
digital readout in
inches of water.
Display range is
Over Limit.
Transmitter output
is over 200%.
%
0
100
O-L
%
99 90
(O-L is alternately
displayed with the
200% value in
engineering units.)
In H 2 O
K
0
Meter has
detected
transmitter output
that is not-anumber.
100
FLOW
Normal display
for transmitter in
HART mode and
square root
output. Digital
readout is gallons
per minute with
1000 multiplier.
0
%
10 0 .0
GPM
100
%
Transmitter is in
output mode.
Bargraph and
readout show
value that was
entered through
the communicator.
OUTPUT MODE
K GPM
0
%
7 7 .9
CHECK STATUS
6/05
100
%
Transmitter in
HART mode is in
non-critical
status. Displayed
value may not be
valid. If display is
“- - -” instead of a
value, transmitter
is in critical
status.
0
%
20 0 .0
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
100
%
Input pressure
equal to or greater
than 200%.
Display flashes
between 200% (or
corresponding
value in EU) and
O-L. Transmitter
locks output at
200% and will go
no higher
regardless of input.
163
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Operation error codes
Operation error codes
Table A-11 identifies possible meter error codes and what they mean.
Table A-11 Smart Meter Error Codes and Descriptions.
If error indication is . . .
Then, it means
You have tried to set local Zero or Span adjustment in a Series
100 transmitter that does not support this option.
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
UPPER
VALUE
%
0
E r0
100
SET
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
ZERO
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
Er1
100
UNITS
%
ANALOG
SET
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
Er 2
UNITS
%
SET
LOWER
VALUE
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
%
Er 3
ANALOG
You have tried to select a process variable for the transmitter
using the VAR SEL. button. The Variable Select button is nonfunctioning on the ST 3000 R300 transmitter.
100
ANALOG
0
You have tried to set a pressure type engineering unit for a
transmitter in square root mode (FLOW) or have tried to set a
flow type engineering unit for a transmitter in linear mode
(pressure). After this error is displayed, the meter will return to
the unit # (EU#) of the engineering unit it was displaying before
the set function was invoked. You may then select another unit
or exit in the normal fashion.
LOWER
VALUE
VAR
SEL.
6/05
UNITS
100
UNITS
%
SET
LOWER
VALUE
You have tried to set Lower or Upper display limit for pressure
type engineering units (EU1 to EUC), or Lower display limit for
flow type engineering units (EUD, EUE) or CUSTOM unit (EUF)
in transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output. Or, you
have tried to set upper display limit for flow or Custom unit in
transmitter with SQUARE ROOT output and URV set to zero (0).
In SQUARE ROOT mode, the transmitter’s URV cannot equal
zero. The Lower and Upper display limits only apply for
CUSTOM (EUF) unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR
output. The Upper display limit also applies for FLOW (EUD,
EUE) and CUSTOM (EUF) units with transmitter in SQUARE
ROOT mode, but the Lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) and
cannot be changed.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
164
Appendix A— Smart Meter Reference - Meter/transmitter interaction
If error indication is . . .
Then, it means
You have tried to set a span value that is outside acceptable
limits for your transmitter.
VAR
SEL.
SPAN
UPPER
VALUE
%
0
Er4
100
UNITS
SET
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
ZERO
VAR
SEL.
UPPE R
VALUE
0
%
Er 5
You have tried to invoke a smart meter set function with the
transmitter’s Write Protect jumper in its Read Only position. You
cannot make changes in the smart meter settings when the
transmitter’s configuration is write protected.
100
UNITS
%
ANALOG
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Meter/transmitter interaction
ATTENTION
After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter powered for at least 30
seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non-volatile memory. If power is
turned off before 30 seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings.
Transmitter power cycling
Cycling transmitter power OFF/ON will have no affect on meter configuration. The meter digital readout
will be in the previously set engineering units and applicable upper and lower display limits will be intact
when transmitter power is restored.
Changing output conformity
If you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from SQUARE ROOT to LINEAR, the meter’s digital
readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent (%) and the FLOW indicator
will go out when the change is downloaded to the transmitter.
Likewise, if you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from LINEAR to SQUARE ROOT, the
meter’s digital readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent (%) and the
FLOW indicator will light when the change is downloaded to the transmitter. In either case, you must
reconfigure the smart meter display as outlined in Table A-9 of this manual.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
165
-
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
166
Appendix B— Configuration Record Sheet - ST 3000 R300 Smart Transmitter
with HART Communications
Appendix B— Configuration Record Sheet
ST 3000 R300 Smart Transmitter
with HART Communications
Configuration Record Sheet
Model Number: ______________________________________________
Series: ___________________________
Measurement Type:
DP
GP
AP
Measurement Range: __________________________________
Mode of Operation: ________________________
Tag Number: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
inH2O
inHg
ftH2O
mmH2O
mmHg
psi
bar
mbar
g/Sq cm
kg/Sq cm
Pa
kPa
torr
atm
MPa
inH2O @ 4 degC
PV Unit (Engineering Units):
mmH2O @ 4 degC
inH2O @ 60 degF
PV LRV (Lower Range Value):
4mAdc = _____________________
PV URV (Upper Range Value): 20 mAdc = _____________________
Linear
Square Root
0.00
0.16
0.32
0.48
1.00
2.00
4.00
8.00
16.0
32.0
deg R
K
PV Transfer Function (Output Conformity):
PV Damping time (Seconds):
SV Unit (Secondary variable):
deg C
PV AO Alarm Type (Failsafe Direction):
Write Protect Option:
Read and Write
deg F
Upscale (Hi)
Downscale (Lo)
Read only
Poll Address ________
Configured By: _______________________________________ Date: ____ / ____ / ____
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
167
-
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
168
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters
Problem
When water is present in the process fluid and ambient temperatures can fall below the freezing point
(32°F/0°C), pressure transmitters and their piping require freeze protection. Transmitters may also require
continuous heating, if the process fluid is tar, wax, or other medium which will solidify at normal ambient.
However, uncontrolled steam or electric heating, in addition to wasting energy, can cause errors and
accidentally destroy the transmitter.
Possible Solutions/Methods
Solution
These two basic solutions are possible:
Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the freezable process fluid out of direct contact
with transmitter.
Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm days while protecting against freeze-ups
under the coldest conditions.
The following paragraphs in this appendix describe a number of methods for implementing both solutions.
Sealing liquid method
The simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the transmitter meter body and its impulse
piping to the process. The small contact (interface) area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid
reduces the mixing of the two fluids.
You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than the process fluid to inhibit mixing.
It also must have freezing and boiling temperatures compatible with the range of temperatures existing at
the site, including the heated interface.
WARNING
The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing liquid with their process fluid.
A reliable sealing liquid is a 50/50 percent (by volume) solution of ethylene-glycol and water. This solution
has a specific gravity of 1.070 at 60°F (15°C), a freezing temperature of –34°F (–36°C), and a boiling
temperature of +225°F (+106°C) at atmospheric pressure. Conventional antifreeze liquids for automobile
coolant systems such as Prestone and
Zerex are solutions of ethylene-glycol with some rust inhibitors and possibly leak sealants added; they may
be used in place of pure ethylene-glycol.
Another sealing liquid, used in many chemical plants, is dibutylphalate an oily-type liquid with a specific
gravity of 1.045 at 70°F (21°C). It has a boiling point 645°F (340°C) and does not freeze so it can be used
down to about –20°F (–30°C).
Figures C-1 and C-2 show typical piping installations for this method. The process fluid must be heated
above its freezing point. This is frequently done by lagging in (insulating) the connecting nipple, shut-off
valve and “T” connector with the process piping. Where the process piping itself requires heating, a steam
or electric trace is run around their components with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing
liquid.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
169
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1"
per foot downward
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" seamless pipe
(short as possible to
reduce head effect)
1/2" pipe union
or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
1/2" 3-valve
manifold,
standard type
Differential
pressure
transmitter
Figure C-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity
Heavier Than Process Fluid.
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" seamless
pipe nipple 6" long
Differential
pressure
transmitter
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1"
per foot downward
1/2" 3-valve
manifold,
standard type
1/2" seamless
pipe nipple 6"
long
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(short as possible to
reduce head effect)
1/2" shut-off
valve (thru port
type desirable)
1/2" pipe union
or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
Make both HP and LP
connections as shown.
Figure C-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter
Than Process Fluid.
The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify that the sealing liquid is at its required
specific gravity.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
170
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Purging
Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous materials from clogging the impulse
lines to pressure, level, or flow transmitters. The bubbler system, using a constant-air flow regulator, is
particularly common on open tank liquid level applications. No heating of impulse lines or transmitter is
required, but normal precautions are required to keep water out of the air supply system.
Gas applications
We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse lines to transmitters measuring gas
flow or pressure. Although these components could be heated similar to water and steam applications, the
simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self draining. This means that the
impulse lines are connected to the lowest point in the transmitter meter body and the piping is sloped
downward at least one inch per foot. (Side-connected transmitters with vent-drains at a lower point in the
meter body must be regularly checked to assure condensate removal.) If the transmitter is located below the
process taps (not recommended), piping must still run downward from the transmitter to the drain point and
then up to the process as shown in Figure C-3. Steam or electric heating of the drain point will prevent
pipe rupture due to freezing.
Transmitter
Figure C-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow.
Mechanical (diaphragm) seals
Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive, yet broadest application of all the
methods. Similar in principle to the liquid seals, diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid
carry-over into the process fluid. This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance checks to assure full
and equal liquid seal legs. Welded diaphragm seals with special fills permit temperatures from –34° to
600°F (–36° to 315°C) at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated to assure
viscosity of tars and similar high-freezing point fluids under the coldest conditions.
You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate expansion and contraction of the
fill fluid under varying temperatures without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area. In general,
conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pressure ranges above approximately 75 psig with special
large diameter elements required for low pressure or differential pressure measurements.
You can lag (insulate) impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process piping, but this practice is only
common with liquid level applications involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1/2-inch impulse
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
171
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
lines. Use a tank-mounted flanged seal in such installations. Otherwise, it is more desirable to keep the
capillary lengths short, the transmitter accessible for maintenance, and (for flow applications) the normal 3valve manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks. Thus, the impulse lines,
valving and diaphragm seals with 1/2-inch connections would be electrically or steam traced, with high
temperature steam permitted without damage to the transmitter. Figures C-4 and C-5 show typical piping
layouts.
The impulse piping, 3-valve
manifold, and upper flanges
of the metal diaphragm seals
must be insulated and, where
required, also heated by
electric or steam.
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type with
suitable temperature rating)
Differential pressure
transmitter with metal
diaphragm seals
Figure C-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with
Metal Diaphragm Seals.
Impulse piping, shut-off valve, and
diaphragm seal distance must be as
short as possible and insulated along
with the process pipe or vessel
Shut-off
Process pressure
transmitter with
metal diaphragm
seal
valve
Pipe union or
coupling
Figure C-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with
Metal Diaphragm Seal.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
172
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Electric heating
Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process interfaces (bodies) than at their
electronics. Normally, it is impractical to heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250°F (107 to 121°C)
without radiant and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics (normally 200°F/93°C).
Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating coils and thermostats set at 200°F (93°C) can
assure viscosity of fluids which freeze below 180°F (82°C) while assuring safe transmitter operation. For
water or similar lower-temperature mediums, the control can be set at 50°F (10°C) to save energy and call
for heat only when temperature and wind conditions require.
Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled, continuous electric heating to prevent water freezing at 0°F (–
18°C) and 20 mph wind velocity, while not exceeding 225°F (107°C) at the transmitter body at 90°F
(32°C) ambient and zero wind velocity. The operating costs in energy for these systems usually exceed the
high initial cost of the thermostat systems. Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100°F (38°C)
without thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will normally exceed the body
temperature rating under opposite extremes.
Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal transmitter body bolts and
containing electrical heating elements and thermostats, certain precautions are required with such
arrangements. Some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available thermostats. Also
thermostat settings should not approach the body temperature limit because the heat gradient across the
meter body can be such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when the thermostat
setting is lower.
Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for Class I, Group D, Division I and II
installations.
The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered. For this reason, we recommend using alarm
devices with manual acknowledgment and reset. Figures C-6 and C-7 show typical piping installations.
Electric heating cable
Temperature
sensor
Temperature
controller
(thermostat)
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type )
Differential pressure
transmitter
Insulated enclosure
Figure C-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Electric Heating and Control.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
173
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Shut-off
Shut-off
valve
valve
Electric heating
cable
Union or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
Insulated
enclosure
Temperature
sensor
Temperature
controller
(thermostat)
Figure C-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Electric Heating Control.
Steam heating
Steam heating is perhaps the most common, yet potentially the most damaging method of protecting
transmitters from freeze-ups. Since steam is generated for use in the overall process operation, it is
considered an available by-product. The most important point to remember when steam heating transmitter
meter bodies is the temperature of the steam that will be used and its pressure. We recommend that you
review the next paragraph Superheated steam considerations to get a better understanding of the
temperature problem with steam heating. In brief, do not assume that 30 psig steam is 274°F (134°C) and
cannot damage a transmitter rated for 250°F (121°C). With steam heating, as with electrical, you should
use insulated transmitter body housing, impulse piping and valves.
It is common practice to use conventional steam traps on all steam heating systems. They permit live,
superheated steam to enter the heating coils and piping down to the trap. You should also use conventional
steam traps with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the transmitter under warmday conditions. If the heating pipes are not carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate
in the piping, they could freeze at low temperatures.
All steam traps require a periodic maintenance program. Dirt, scale, and water softeners will cause traps to
stick or jam which result in their either blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam, allowing
condensate freeze-up in cold weather. When steam traps are used for cold-weather freeze protection of
water lines, a thermostat controlled steam supply valve, which will shut off the steam at ambient
temperatures higher than 50°F (10°C), will save steam and prevent overheating.
A more general solution is offered by a specialized type of trap which throttles condensate flow based on
its temperature. This backs up hot water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure, assuring
temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure. Models are available to set the
condensate temperature from about 70° to 200°F (21° to 93°C). They must be located within 6 to 12 inches
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
174
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
(15 to 30 cm) of the transmitter body and, like all steam traps, they also require periodic maintenance. The
engineering of this type system is more complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss
upstream of the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the steam/water
interface. It could occur within the heater coil or further up the steam line, thus affecting the heating
efficiency within the insulated enclosure. Therefore, steam control of materials which freeze or become too
viscous above 100°F (38°C) should probably not be attempted without some experimenting with the
specific piping layout used.
Uncontrolled steam heating, even with the best pressure regulation and desuperheating of steam, should not
be used to maintain transmitter temperatures above 100°F (38°C), since this type of fixed Btu input must
either over or under-heat under normal ambient swings.
As with electric heating, there are many types of commercial steam heating units available such as radiant
heaters, hollow meter body studs or just tubing lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body. The
same precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions.
Figures C-8 and C-9 show typical piping installations. Table C-1 summarizes the temperature ranges for
the various freeze protection systems.
Steam Supply (low pressure)
Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover
Shut-off
valve
1/4" OD steam tracer line
Impulse piping with
1/4" thick insulation
Steam heat
tracer line
Pipe strap about
every 15"
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping
Steam trap or
condensate
temperature
valvle
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type )
Differential pressure
transmitter
Insulated enclosure
Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and
condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.
Figure C-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
175
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Steam Supply (low pressure)
1/4" OD steam tracer line
Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover
Shut-off
valve
Steam heat
tracer line
Impulse piping with
1/4" thick insulation
Pipe strap about
every 15"
Shut-off
valve
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping
Shut-off
valve
Union or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
Steam trap or
condensate
temperature
valvle
Insulated enclosure
Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and
condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.
Figure C-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.
Table C-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems
Operating
Temperature
Range
οF
οC
34
36
20
30
50
10
100
38
200
93
225
106
325
163
600
315
Liquid Seals
Diaphragm
Seals
Ethylene DibutylGlycol
Phthalate
Steam Heating
No Seals
Trap
CTV
Valve
Electric Heat
No
Control
Thermostated
Note: Broken lines indicate areas of caution.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
176
Appendix C – Freeze Protection of Transmitters - Possible Solutions/Methods
Superheated steam considerations
We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212°F (100°C) only at the normal atmospheric pressure
of about 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (psia). If the pressure of steam is increased above 14.7 psia,
the temperature of the steam is also increased. For example, if we have steam at 30 pounds per square inch
gage (psig), the steam temperature is 274°F (134°C).
On industrial flow and pressure measurement applications, we may be required to use steam to heat the
impulse piping to the flow or pressure transmitter, as well as the transmitter itself. For these applications,
we must verify the temperature of the heating steam used. As an example, assume that steam at 100 psig
saturated (338°F/170°C) is to be reduced to 30 psig pressure for the heating system. Too frequently, it is
assumed that this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274°F (134°C), the temperature of saturated
steam at 30 psig. Wrong! A reduction of the steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam
temperature.
In our example, we were talking about saturated steam in the main header from the boiler. But modern
industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste heat go up the stack. After reaching the boiling point in the
drum, the steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas exit, extracting additional
heat energy and being raised to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure.
This is superheat and, depending on boiler design, it may amount to 50 to 300°F (10 to 149°C) above the
saturated steam temperature. It also permits packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission
from the process. Thus, in the typical application, the problem of steam heating is compounded by the
additional superheat in the main header.
Specifically, when steam is reduced in pressure, it retains about the same latent heat or the same
Btu’s/pound at the reduced pressure. Therefore, in our example, steam at 100 psig and 338°F (170°C) when
reduced to 30 psig steam will have a temperature of 306°F (152°C) or a loss of only 32°F (18°C).
This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater. This device mixes cold water with
the superheated steam to reduce its temperature by removing Btu’s per pound of water (steam). It is also
possible to use temperature controlled steam traps, which actually allow the steam to condense to water and
therefore reduce its temperature to a pre-set value.
Table C-2 lists the various values of steam pressure, saturated steam temperatures at these pressures,
degrees of superheat added to the saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it is
reduced to 30 psig steam.
Table C-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values
Pressure
(1)
Saturated
Temperature
(2)
Superheat Added (3)
Final Steam
Temperature
(2) + (3)
Actual Temperature
of Steam When
Reduced From (1)*
to 30 psig
psig
°F
°C
°F
°C
°F
°C
°F
°C
50
298
147
None
None
298
147
290
143
100
338
170
100
55
438
225
420
215
150
366
185
120
66
486
251
460
234
200
387
198
150
83
537
281
500
260
400
448
231
200
111
648
342
600
316
600
489
254
250
139
739
393
660
349
* (1) equals pressure in column one with superheat added.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
177
-
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
178
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - Introduction
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications
Introduction
Reference information
Information is provided to clarify the Hazardous Location installation requirements in North America and
internationally. An explanation of the applicable enclosure classification systems is also provided.
North American Hazardous Location Standards
NEC and CEC electrical codes
Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous (classified) locations of the United States is conducted
under the provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 500, and within
Canada under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) C22.1, Part 1, Section 18.
Classes
Hazardous (classified) locations, in both the United States and Canada, are categorized into one of three
classes:
Class I - Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in quantities sufficient to produce
explosive or ignitable mixtures
Class II - Presence of combustible dusts, powders or grains
Class III - Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings
Divisions
The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of risk present:
Division 1 -
Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors - or combustible
dust in suspension – are continuously, intermittently or periodically present under normal
operating conditions.
Division 2 -
Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present, but normally confined within
closed containers or systems from which they can escape only under abnormal or fault
conditions. Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be thrown into
suspension.
Examples
Given the criteria above, the following examples are made:
Class III, Division 1 - A class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or
material processing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured or used.
Class III, Division 2 - A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are
stored or handled.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
179
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
Group classifications
Flammable gases, vapors and ignitable dusts, fibers and flyings are classified into groups according to the
energy required to ignite the most easily-ignitable mixture within air. Group classifications are as follows:
Class I Group Classifications
Group A - Atmospheres containing acetylene.
Group B - Atmospheres containing hydrogen, fuel and combustible process gases
containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by volume, or gases or vapors
of equivalent hazard.
Group C - Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors of
equivalent hazard.
Group D - Atmospheres such as acetone, ammonia, benzene, butane, cyclopropane,
ethanol, gasoline, hexane, methanol, methane, natural gas, naphtha,
propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
Class II Group Classifications
Group E - Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including aluminum,
magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other metals of similarly
hazardous characteristics.
Group F - Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts including carbon
black, charcoal, coal or other dusts that have been sensitized by other
materials so that they present an explosion hazard.
Group G - Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in Group E or F,
including flour, wood, grain, and other dusts of similarly hazardous
characteristics.
Methods of protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in the given locations.
Protection
Concept
6/05
Designation
Permitted Use
Principle
Explosionproof
XP
Division 1 & 2
Contains explosion and quenches
flame
Intrinsic Safety
IS
Division 1 & 2
Limit energy of sparks under normal
and fault conditions
Pressurized
Type X and Y
Division 1 & 2
Keeps flammable gas out
Pressurized
Type Z
Division 1 & 2
Keeps flammable gas out
Nonincendive
NI
Division 1 & 2
No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces
under normal conditions
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
180
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
Temperature classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous (classified) location must also be
classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as
referenced to either 40 °C or the maximum operating ambient of the equipment (whichever is greater). The
maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous
atmosphere present. The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in Table D-1.
Table D-1 Temperature Identification Numbers (NEC/CEC)
Maximum Temperature
Identification
Degrees C
Degrees F
Number
450
842
T1
300
572
T2
280
536
T2A
260
500
T2B
230
446
T2C
215
419
T2D
200
392
T3
180
356
T3A
165
329
T3B
160
320
T3C
135
275
T4
120
248
T4A
100
212
T5
85
185
T6
Intrinsically safe apparatus parameters
6/05
Vmax
= Maximum safe voltage which can be applied to the apparatus terminals.
Imax
= Maximum safe current which can be applied to the apparatus terminals.
Ci
= Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus which can be considered present at the terminals.
Li
= Unprotected inductance in the apparatus which can be considered present at the terminals.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
181
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
Associated apparatus parameters
Voc
= Maximum output voltage which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
voltage is the maximum from a single channel.
Isc
= Maximum output current which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
current is the maximum from a single channel.
*Vt
= Maximum output voltage which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location.
This voltage is the maximum across any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
*It
= Maximum output current which can be delivered to the hazardous (classified) location. This
current is the maximum through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
Ca
= Maximum capacitance which can be connected to the apparatus.
La
= Maximum inductance which can be connected to the apparatus.
*CSA does not recognize these parameters at this time
Entity concept
Under entity requirements, the concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated
apparatus, not specifically examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the
voltage (Vmax) and current (Imax), which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically
safe, considering faults, must be equal to or greater than the voltage (Voc or Vt) and current (Isc or It)
levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering faults and applicable factors. In
addition, the maximum unprotected capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of the intrinsically safe apparatus,
including interconnecting wiring, must be less than or equal to the capacitance (Ca) and inductance (La)
which can be safely connected to the associated apparatus. If these criteria are met, then the combination
may be connected and remain intrinsically safe. Both FMRC and CSA define the entity parameters as
listed in Tables D-2, D-3 and D-4 below:
Factory Mutual (FM) Approval
Code
1C
Description
• Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D. Dust-Ignitionproof for Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F & G. Suitable for Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals required within
18” of enclosure, Group A only.
• Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1, T4 at 40°C, T3A at 93°C maximum ambient, when
connected in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51205784.
• Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D; Suitable for Classes II & III,
Division 2, Groups F & G, T4 at 93°C maximum ambient, hazardous locations. 42 Vdc max.
• Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations (NEMA 4X).
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
182
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - North American Hazardous Location Standards
Table D-2 FM Entity Parameters
Intrinsic Safety
Entity Parameters (1)
Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,
Groups A- G
VMax ≤ 30 V
IMax = 225 mA
PMax = 1.2 W
Ci = 4.2 nF
Li = 0
With no integral indicator, or with
integral smart meter option SM
Li = 150 µH
With analog meter option ME
(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51205784.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Code
2J
Description
• Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D. Dust-Ignition-Proof for Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals not required. 42 Vdc max.
• Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G; Class III,
Divisions 1, T4 at 40°C, T3A at 93°C maximum ambient.
Install per Honeywell drawing 51450806.
• Suitable for Class I, II & III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F & G hazardous locations, T4
at 93°C. 42 Vdc max.
• Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations (Encl 4X).
CSA Certified Barriers (1)
Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,
Groups
30V / 300 Ω
28V / 200 Ω
A-G
20V / 150 Ω
(1)
6/05
Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51450806.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
183
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
IEC Classification of hazardous locations
The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the construction of explosion protected
electrical apparatus identified. These recommendations are found within IEC 79-0 through 79-15 and 79-28.
For all EC countries as well as various neighboring countries (CENELEC member states), the European
Standards EN 50 014 to EN 50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected
electrical apparatus. They were established on the basis of the IEC Recommendations, however in
comparison they are much more detailed.
Zones
Defined within IEC 7-10, Hazardous locations are categorized into three zones:
Zone 0 -
Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously, or is present for long periods.
Zone 1 -
Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation.
Zone 2 -
Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation and, if it does occur, it
will exist for a short period only.
Groups
Flammable gases, vapors and mists are classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the
most easily ignitable mixture within air. Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres it may be used
within as follows:
6/05
Group IIC -
Atmospheres containing acetylene, hydrogen, fuel and combustible process gases or vapors
of equivalent hazard.
Group IIB -
Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard.
Group IIA -
Atmospheres such as acetone, benzene, butane, cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane,
methanol, methane, natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
184
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
Methods of protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in given locations.
Protection
Concept
Designation
Permitted Use
Principle
Flameproof
d
Zone 1 & 2
Contains explosion and quenches flame.
Intrinsic Safety
ia
Zone 0, 1 & 2
Limit energy of sparks under 2 faults.
Intrinsic Safety
ib
Zone 1 & 2
Limit energy of sparks under 1 fault.
Pressurized
p
Zone 1
Keeps flammable gas out.
Encapsulation
m
Zone 1 & 2
Keeps flammable gas out.
Increased Safety
e
Zone 1 & 2
No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces.
Powder Filled
q
Zone 1 & 2
Contains explosion and quenches flame.
Oil Immersion
o
Zone 1 & 2
Keeps flammable gas out.
non-sparking
nA
Enclosed Break
nC
Zone 2
Contains explosion and quenches flame.
Limited Energy
nA
Zone 2
Limit energy of sparks and surface
temperature under normal conditions.
Restricted
Breathing
nR
Zone 2
Keeps flammable gas out.
No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces under
normal conditions.
Temperature classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous location must also be classified for the
maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to the
maximum operating ambient of the equipment. The maximum surface temperature must be less than the
minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present. The temperature shall be
indicated in identification numbers as listed in Table D-3.
Table D-3 Temperature Identification Numbers (IEC)
Maximum Temperature
6/05
Identification
Degrees C
Degrees F
Number
450
842
T1
300
572
T2
200
392
T3
135
275
T4
100
212
T5
85
185
T6
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
185
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classifications
Certification and conformity details
CENELEC / LCIE Certification
Code
Description
3D
• Flameproof, Supply ≤ 45 Vdc, IP 66/67
3A
• Intrinsically Safe
EEx d IIC T6
EEx ia IIC T5, −40 ≤ Tamb ≤ 93°C
• Flameproof, Supply ≤ 45 Vdc, IP 66/67
EEx d IIC T6
LCIE Intrinsic Safety Entity Parameters (1)
Ui ≤ 30 V
II = 100 mA
PI = 1.2 W
Ci = 4.2 nF
Ri = 0
Li = 0
With no integral indicator, or with
integral smart meter option SM
Li = 150 µH
With analog meter option ME
(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51450805.
Standards Australia (LOSC) Certification
Code
4H
Description
• Intrinsically Safe
Ex ia IIC T4 Class I Zone 0
• Flameproof
Ex d IIC T6 Class I Zone 1
• Non-Sparking Apparatus - Type of Protection ‘n’
Ex n IIC T6 Class I Zone 2
LOSC Intrinsic Safety Entity Parameters
Ui ≤ 30 V
II = 100 mA
PI = 1.2 W
Ci = 4.2 nF
6/05
Li = 0
With no integral indicator, or with
integral smart meter option SM
Li = 150 µH
With analog meter option ME
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
186
Appendix D —Hazardous Area Classifications - Enclosure Ratings
Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity
Code
3N
Description
• Electrical Apparatus With Type of Protection “n” per IEC 79-15.
Ex II 3 GD T(1) X (Council Directive 94/9/EC)
−40 ≤ Ta ≤ 93°C.
Enclosure IP 66/67
Zone 2 Parameters
Ui ≤ 30 V
II = 22 mA
PI = 1.2 W
Temp. Code (1) T4 at Ta 93°C Maximum Ambient
Temp. Code (1) T5 at Ta 80°C Maximum Ambient
Temp. Code (1) T6 at Ta 65°C Maximum Ambient
Enclosure Ratings
NEMA and IEC Recognition
The NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association) enclosure classifications are recognized in the
US. The IEC Publication 529 Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the
world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications. The following paragraphs provide a
discussion of the comparison between NEMA enclosure type numbers and IEC enclosure classification
designations.
IEC Classifications
IEC Publication 529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures, provides a system
for specifying the enclosures of electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by
the enclosure. IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against mechanical damage of equipment,
risk of explosion, or conditions such as moisture (produced for example by condensation), corrosive
vapors, fungus, or vermin.
IEC Designations
Basically, the IEC designation consists of the letters IP followed by two numerals. The first characteristic
numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid
foreign objects entering the enclosure. The second characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection
provided by the enclosure with respect to the harmful ingress of water.
NEMA Standards
NEMA Standards Publication 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum), does test
for environmental conditions such as corrosion, rust, icing, oil, and coolants. For this reason, and because
the tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical, the IEC enclosure classification
designations cannot be exactly equated with NEMA enclosure type numbers.
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
187
-
Table D-4 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure type numbers to IEC enclosure
classification designations. The NEMA types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC
classifications; for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert from IEC classifications to NEMA
types.
Table D-4 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure
Classification
NEMA Enclosure
Type Number
IEC Enclosure
Classification Designation
1
IP 10
2
IP 11
3
IP 54
3R
IP 14
3S
IP 54
4 and 4X
IP 56
5
IP 52
6 and 6P
IP 67
12 and 12K
IP 52
13
IP 54
NOTE: This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529
6/05
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
188
Index -
Index
A
Analog meter connections, 37
Approvals, 35
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 183
Factory Mutual (FM), 182
D
B
Barrier diaphragms, 97
inspecting and cleaning, 97
C
Calibration
analog output signal, 108
range, 109
reset, 111
Certification
CENELEC / LCIE, 186
Standards Australia (LOSC), 186
Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity, 187
Communication errors, 115
Communications
request/response format, 7
starting, 41
transmitter/communicator, 7
Communicator
connections, 68
connections to transmitter, 40
disconnecting, 64
display symbols, 53
function keys, 53
keyboard, 52
memory module or data pack, 46
menu summary, 51
online menu summary, 50
Software compatibility, 39
viewing/entering device information, 59
Configuration
device information, 59
LRV and URV, 57
PV damping, 62
PV engineering units, 56
PV transfer function (output conformity), 60
SV units (meter body temperature), 63
tag number, 55
Configuration data
6/05
reviewing, 42
Configuration database, 46
Configuration parameter summary, 48
Constant-current source mode, 67
Critical failures, 114
clearing critical failures, 118
Damping time, 62
adjusting, 62
Damping Time Constant, 49
Database
save/restore, 93
Device Information, 49
Diagnostic messages, 114
communication errors, 114
critical failures, 114
non-critical failures, 114
Diaphragm seals, 171
E
Electric heating, 173
Electrical codes
IEC and CENELEC, 184
NEC and CEC, 179
EMC Directive, 13
Enclosure Ratings, 187
Enclosures
IEC classification, 188
NEMA standards, 188
Engineering units, 56
pre-programmed, 56
selecting, 56
F
Failsafe direction, 90
Failure mode alarm
jumper, 43
Flange adapter
installing, 32
Flange connections
description, 31
Flange mounted transmitter, 25
Mounting, 25
Flow engineering units
Smart meter, 148
Flow measurement application, 69
Freeze protection, 169
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
189
Index -
Operation data, 87
failsafe output direction, 89
input pressure, 88
message (or scratchpad) area, 89
output, 88
temperature, 89
upper and lower range limits, 88
Output conformity, 49, 60
selecting, 60
Output conformity and smart meter configuration, 148
Output meter options, 37
Output mode, 67
H
Hazardous location installation, 36
Hazardous location requirements, 179
J
Jumpers
failsafe direction, 43
repositioning procedure, 90
L
Lightning Protection, 36
Liquid level measurement application, 83
differential pressure (DP), 73, 75
gauge pressure (GP), 78
remote diaphragm seals, 83
Local smart meter options, 10
Local zero and span
adjusting (procedure), 144
Loop wiring, 37
LRV, 57
keying in, 57
setting to applied pressure, 58
LRV (Lower Range Value), 48
M
Maintenance routines, 97
Master reset, 118
Meter body
replacing, 103
Model number
format, 4
Mounting
suggested location, 29
Mounting area
considerations, 14
Mounting transmitter
bracket mounting, 18
flange mounting, 25
flush mounting, 24
Models STA122, STA922, 21
remote diaphragm seal mounting, 26
Multidrop mode, 49, 64
N
Non-critical failures, 115
Nonvolatile memory, 46
O
Operation
data access, 87
6/05
P
Parts identification, 119
Piping, 28
guidelines, 31
Poll address, 49, 64
Potential noise sources, 14
Power supply voltage
operating range, 33
Pressure measurement application
absolute pressure (AP), 81
differential pressure (DP), 71
gauge pressure (GP), 78
Pressure ratings, 16
Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
replacing, 100
Process connections
summary, 30
Process head bolt
torque ratings, 100
PV engineering unit, 48
R
Recommended spare parts, 137
Restore database, 95
S
Sealing liquid, 169
SM 3000 smart meter connections, 38
Smart meter
configuration and output conformity, 148
configuration using meter pushbuttons, 147
engineering units code, 148
error codes, 164
indications, 163
meter/transmitter interaction, 165
selecting engineering units, 149
setting display of LRV (using meter pushbuttons), 151
setting display of URV (using meter pushbuttons), 155
setting display using HART communicator, 160
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
190
Index -
Smart meter display, 44
description, 141
operating conditions and specifications, 143
Smart meter option (option SM), 140
Software version compatibility, 39
Solution Support Center, iv
Span, 57, 58
Square root dropout, 61
Square root output, 60
ST 3000 smart transmitter, 2
Start-up, 66
AP transmitter
pressure measurement application, 81
DP transmitter
flow measurement application, 69
liquid level measurement application, 73, 75
pressure measurement application, 71
DP transmitter (remote seals)
liquid level measurement application, 83
GP transmitter
liquid level measurement application, 78
pressure measurement application, 78
Start-up tasks reference, 12
Static electricity damage, 90
Status, 89
clearing critical status, 118
Steam heating, 174
Superheated steam considerations, 177
T
Tag number, 48, 55
Temperature Limits
Operating, 14
Three-valve manifold
piping, 28
Torque ratings, 100
Transmitter
failure mode alarm jumper, 43
6/05
mounting, 17
operating temperature limits, 14
piping, 28
pressure ratings, 16
start-up, 66
wiring, 33
write protection option, 43
Transmitter models, 5
Transmitter types, 4
Turndown Ratio, 62
U
URV, 57
keying in, 57
setting to applied pressure, 58
URV (Upper Range Value), 48
V
Vibration sources, 14
W
Wiring transmitter
connections, 34
Working memory, 46
Write protection option, 90
Writing data in the message area, 92
Z
Zero and span adjust options, 10
Zero corrects, 21
Zero shift, 21
ST 3000 HART Transmitter Release 300 User Manual
191
Addendum to
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
Release 300 with HART Communications Option
User Manual 34-ST-25-17
Overview
Two new models have been added to the family of ST3000 Smart
Transmitters:
Gauge Pressure Model STG19L
Gauge Pressure Model STG99L.
Each of these has an Upper Range Limit (URL) of 10000 psi (690 bar),
which is significantly higher than previously available models. Also, each
of these new models has significantly higher ratings for Maximum
Working Pressure (10000 psi, or 690 bar) and Overpressure (15000 psi, or
1034 bar). The burst pressure is rated at 26000 psi (1793 bar).
Except for the higher operating range, each of these two new models
includes physical and functional features similar to those of closely
related family members (STG1xL and STG9xL). With the exceptions
noted in this addendum, all parts of User Manual 34-ST-25-17 apply to
these new models.
Because of the similarities between new and existing models, these new
devices can be used as direct replacements in circumstances that require
higher pressure capabilities.
Details of pressure ranges for these new models are specified in
“Additions and Changes to the Manual”, below.
Additions to the
User Manual
The additions to User Manual 34-ST-25-17 that relate to the new Gauge
Pressure transmitter models are given in Table 1 of this addendum. Use
the information in Table 1 to reference and annotate your User Manual.
Table 1 – Additions to the User Manual
Page # in User
Manual
15
Sub-Section
3- Preinstallation
Considerations –
Considerations for ST 3000
Transmitter
Table 4 Operating
Temperature Limits
(Transmitters with Silicone
Fluid Fill DC200)
16
3- Preinstallation
Considerations –
Considerations for ST 3000
Transmitter
Description of Change
In the left column of Table 4, under the heading
Gauge Pressure, add the information as
indicated by the highlights in Exhibit A, below.
(Note: Ranges for Ambient Temperature and
Process Interface Temperature are the same as
for other models in each series.)
In the row of Table 5 titled Gauge Pressure, add
the information as highlighted in Exhibit B, below.
Pressure Ratings
Table 5 Transmitter
Overpressure Ratings
120
12.1 Replacement Parts
Figure 40 Major ST3000
Smart Transmiter Parts
Reference
At the right of Figure 40, under LGP Models,
references to Figure 48 have been added for
ST 3000 Transmitters STG19L and STG99L.
NOTE:
The use of Figure 48 (and corresponding Table
60) is the same for all LGP meter bodies,
including Models STG19L and STG99L.
That is, the model number of the meter body is
specified on its nameplate.
In Figure 40, add the information highlighted in
Exhibit C in this addendum
.
Exhibit A –Additions to Table 4
Transmitter Type and Model
Ambient Temperature
Process Interface Temperature
°C
°F
°C
°F
-40 to 70
-40 to 158
-40 to 70
-40 to 158
STD125
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
STD120, STD130, STD170
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
STD904, STD924, STD930,
STD974
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
STG140, STG170, STG180
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
STG14L, STG17L, STG18L,
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 110
-40 to 230
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 150 †
-40 to 302 †
-15 to 65
5 to 149
-15 to 95 ††
5 to 203 ††
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 110
-40 to 230
Draft Range
STD110
Differential Pressure
Gauge Pressure
STG19L
STG14T
STG93P
STG944, STG974
STG90L, STG94L, STG97L,
STG98L, STG99L
Exhibit B –Additions to Table 5
Transmitter Type
Upper Range Limit (URL)
Maximum Working
Pressure Rating
Overpressure Rating
Draft Range
10 inches H2O (25 mbar)
50 psi (3.5 bar)
50 psi (3.5 bar)
(No overpressure
protection is provided)
Differential Pressure
400 inches H2O (1 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
150 psi (10.3 bar)
300 psi (21 bar)
300 psi (215 bar)
450 psi (31 bar)
500 psi (35 bar)
500 psi (35 bar)
750 psi (52 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
4500 psi (310 bar)
6000 psi (415 bar)
6000 psi (415 bar)
9000 psi (620 bar)
10000 psi (690 bar)
10000 psi (690 bar)
15000 psi (1034 bar)
780 mmHg Absolute
(1 bar)
780 mmHg Absolute
(1 bar)
Full vacuum to 1550
mmHg Absolute (2 bar)
500 psia (35 bar)
500 psia (35 bar)
750 psia (52 bar)
Gauge Pressure
Absolute Pressure
Exhibit B –Additions to Table 5
ST 3000 Release 300
Elect ronic Housing Assembly: See Figures 42 and 43
Meter Bodies
DP
Models
STD110
STD120
STD125
STD130
STD170
STD904
STD924
STD930
STD974
See
Figure
44
44
44
44
44
44,45
44,45
44,45
44,45
Flange
Mounted
Models
STF128
STF132
STF12F
STF13F
STF14F
STF924
STF932
STF92F
STF93F
Single Head
GP Models
STG140
STG170
STG180
See
Figure
46
46
46
Single Head
AP Models
STA122
STA140
STA922
STA940
See
Figure
46
46
46
46
See
Figure
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Dual Head
GP Models
STG944
STG974
See
Figure
47
47
Remote Diaphragm Seal
Models
STR12D
LGP Models
STR13D
STR14G
STR14A
STR17G
STR93D
STR94G
Attention: No replacement meter body is
available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models.
High
Temperature
Models
STG14T
STF14T
LGP
Models
STG14L
STG17L
STG18L
STG19 L
STG90L
STG94L
STG97L
STG98L
STG99 L
See
Figure
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
Flush Mount
GP Models
STG93P
See
Figure
49
See
Figure
51
51
Figure 40 major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
34-ST-99-24
®
Release 300 with HART Communications
Option
Transmitter Models:
STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170,
STD924, STD930
Overview
10/04
Addendum
(to User Manual
34-ST-25-17)
Replacement Meterbody and Heads
The ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter, Models:
•
•
STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, and STD170
STD924 and STD930 with optional Tantalum or Monel diaphragm
is now being shipped with newly designed meter body and process heads. If a
replacement meter body is needed, it should be ordered from the Model Number stated
on the meter body nameplate. This number includes the letter “S” after the model
number; for example, STD110S-xxx.
This new transmitter is functionally identical to previous models in that the working
ranges (Lower Range Limit to Upper Range Limit) and intended applications have not
changed. However, the specifications for the maximum Pressure Rating and for the
Overpressure Rating have been enhanced in all models except the draft range
transmitter. A summary of specifications is given in Table 5.
The new versions, which will continue as Models STD110, STD120, STD125,
STD130, STD170, STD924, and STD930, differ only in the physical size and form of
the meter body, process head, and associated components.
With exceptions noted in this addendum, information given in User’s Manual
34-ST-25-17 applies also to this newer design.
Installation, operation, maintenance, calibration, and troubleshooting tasks remain
virtually the same as for the previous version. Differences appear primarily in torque
specifications when replacing meter bodies, and in part numbering and parts
recognition when replacing components or assemblies.
Related Publications
10/04
This addendum provides details for parts replacement that span a variety of
applications of the Models STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170, STD924,
and STD930.
For Series 100 Models
ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter
Series 100 Differential Pressure Models
Specification and Model Selection Guide
34-ST-03-60
For Series 900 Models
ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter
Series 900 Differential Pressure Models
Specification and Model Selection Guide
34-ST-03-65
34-ST-99-37 (Addendum to 34-ST-25-17)
199 of 124
Additions to the
User Manual
The additions to User Manual 34-ST-25-17 that relate to the newly designed meter body
and process heads are given in Table 1 of this addendum.
Use the information in Table 1 to reference and annotate your User Manual.
Table 1 Additions to the User Manual
Page # in User
Manual
Sub-Section
16
Considerations for ST 3000 FF
Transmitter
Table 5 Transmitter
Overpressure Ratings
Description of Change
The Maximum Working Pressure Rating and the
Overpressure Rating has been enhanced for all
models included in this addendum except for the
draft range transmitter.
For more information, refer to Table 5.
32
98-100
4 – Installation - Piping ST 3000
Transmitter
In Step 5, do not use the torque specification of 47.5
to 54 N·m (35 to 40 lb-ft).
Table 13 Installing Flange
Adapter
Instead, torque Flange Adapter bolts evenly to
47,5 N•m +/- 2,4 N•m (35 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft).
9 - Maintenance - Inspecting and
Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Table 41 Inspecting and
Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
In Step 8 of Table 41, do not use specifications for
head torque given in Table 42.
Instead, torque head bolts/nuts to the specifications
given in Table 2 of this addendum.
Table 42 Process Head Bolt
Torque Ratings
103-105
9 - Maintenance Replacing Meter
Body
Instead, torque head bolts/nuts to the specifications
given in Table 2 of this addendum.
Table 44 Replacing Meter Body
Only
123-125
9 - Parts List – Replacement
Parts
Figure 44 Series 100 and Series
900 DP Meter Body for Models
STD924 & STD930 C, D, G, H,
K, and L STD974
Table 55 Parts Identification for
callouts in Figure 44.
Figure 44 illustrates the replacement parts available
for the previous style of the transmitter, and Table 55
provides part numbers and descriptions for the parts
called out in Figure 44.
For the new style, use Figure 1 of this addendum to
locate replacement parts, and use Table 3 of this
addendum for part numbers and descriptions.
For applicability of parts, refer to:
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
Series 100 Differential Pressure Models
Specification and Model Selection Guide
34-ST-03-60
ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter
Series 900 Differential Pressure Models
Specification and Model Selection Guide
34-ST-03-65
Table 2 Torque Table - Process Head Bolts/Nuts
Bolt Type
51452557-001
5142557-002 and –003
51452557-004
(Carbon Steel standard; no option
specified)
(NACE [“CR” option] and
Non-NACE [“SS” option]
Stainless Steel)
(B7M Alloy Steel
[“B7” option])
51451864XXXX except
…XXX5
(All STD 3000 and SMV
3000 Transmitters except
STD110)
67,8 N•M +/- 3,4 N•M
56,9 N•M +/- 2,8 N•M
48,8 N•M +/- 2,4 N•M
(50.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.5 LbFt)
(42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft)
(36.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft)
51451864XXX5
(Model STD110
Transmitter [draft range]
only)
20,3 N•M +/- 1,0 N•M
20,3 N•M +/- 1,0 N•M
20,3 N•M +/- 1,0 N•M
(15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 LbFt)
(15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft)
(15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft)
Meterbody Type
Figure 1 ST 3000 Model STD110, STD120, STD125, STD130, STD170, STD924, STD930
(Rev S or greater)
Table 3 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 1
Key
No.
1
Part Number
Specify complete
model number from
nameplate plus R300
Specify complete
model number from
nameplate plus R300
Description
Series 100 Meter Body replacement kit includes:
Qty/
Unit
1
Meter body (without Process Heads)
Neoprene O-ring, Meter Body to Electronica Housing (K7; Part no.
30752785-007; 1/unit)
Process Head Gasket; PTFE (K6; Part No. 51452560-002; 2/unit)
Series 900 Meter Body replacement kit includes:
1
Meter body (without Process Heads)
Neoprene O-ring, Meter Body to Electronica Housing (K7; Part no.
30752785-007; 1/unit)
Process Head Gasket; PTFE (K6; Part No. 51452560-002; 2/unit)
Bolting Kits:
51452866-001
Bolts and Nuts Kit, Carbon Steel
51452866-002
Bolts A286 SS (NACE) and Nuts, 304 SS (NACE) Kit
51452866-003
Bolts, 316 SS (non-NACE) and Nuts, 316 SS (non-NACE) Kit
51452866-004
Bolts B7M and Nuts 7M Kit
Each Bolts and Nuts Kit includes:
Kc
K4
K8
································
Bolt, Hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 Inches long (Flange Adapter)········
4
································
Nut, Hex, 7/16 UNC (Process Head)····················································
4
································
Bolt, Hex Head, 7/16 UNC X 3.25 inches long (Process Head)············
4
Vent and Plug Kits:
30753785-001
Drain and Plug Kit, stainless steel
30753787-001
Drain and Plug Kit, Monel
30753786-001
Drain and Plug Kit, Hastelloy C
Each Drain and Plug Kit includes:
K1
································
Pipe Plug ····················································································
4
K2
································
Vent Plug ·····························································································
2
K3
································
Vent Bushing ·······················································································
2
Meterbody Gasket Kits:
K6
51452865-001
Meterbody Gasket Kit (PTFE Material); Kit includes:
51452865-002
Meterbody Gasket Kit (Viton Material); Kit includes:
·································
Gasket, Process Head ·········································································
6
Ka
·································
Gasket, Flange Adapter ·······································································
6
K7
·································
O-Ring, Meterbody to Electronics Housing ··········································
3
Process Head Gasket Kits:
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
K6
51452868-001
Gasket only, Process Head (12 PTFE Gaskets/pack)
12
K6
51452868-002
Gasket only, Process Head (6 Viton Head O-Rings)
6
K6
51452868-007
Gasket only, Process Head Graphite Gasket (use only as replacement
of existing graphite gasket)
6
Qty/
Unit
Flange Adapter Gasket Kits:
Ka
51452868-004
Gasket only, Flange Adapter, 6 PTFE Adapter Gaskets
6
Ka
51452868-005
Gasket only, Flange Adapter, 6 VITON Adapter O-Rings
6
Ka
51452868-0078
Gasket only, Flange Adapter Graphite Gasket (use only as
replacement of existing graphite gasket)
6
½ inch NPT Flange Adapter Kits:
Flange Adapter Kit, with:
51452867-110
SS Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts
51452867-210
SS Flange Adapters and with A286 SS (NACE) bolts
51452867-310
SS Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
51452867-410
SS Flange Adapters and with B7M alloy steel bolts
51452867-150
Monel Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts
51452867-350
Monel Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
51452867-130
Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts
51452867-330
Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
Each 1/2-inch NPT Flange Adapter Kit includes:
Ka
···································
Gasket, Flange Adapter ································································
2
Kb
···································
1/2-inch NPT Flange Adapter ·························································
2
···································
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 inches long, Flange Adapter ··
4
Kc
Blind Flange Adapter Kits:
51452867-100
SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with Carbon Steel bolts
51452867-200
SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with A286 SS (NACE) bolts
51452867-300
SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit, with 316 SS (non-NACE) bolts
51452867-400
SS Blind Flange Adapters and B7M alloy steel bolts
Each Blind Flange Adapter Kit includes:
Ka
···································
Gasket, Flange Adapter ································································
2
Kb
···································
Blind Flange Adapter ······································································
2
···································
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.50 inches long, Flange Adapter ··
4
Kc
Table 4 Process Head Assembly Kits
Key
No
Part Number
51452864-010
51452864-012
K1
K2
K3
K5
K6
Ka
Description
Process Head Kits:
Process Head Assembly Kit, with PTFE Gasket and with:
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) with side vent/drain
51452864-020
51452864-022
Stainless steel head without side vent/drain
Stainless steel head with side vent/drain
51452864-030
51452864-032
Hastelloy C head without side vent/drain
Hastelloy C head with side vent/drain
51452864-040
51452864-042
Monel head without side vent/drain
Monel head with side vent/drain
51452864-050
51452864-052
Carbon steel head (nickel plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (nickel plated) with side vent/drain
51452864-110
51452864-112
Process Head Assembly Kit, with VITON Gasket and with:
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (zinc plated) with side vent/drain
51452864-120
51452864-122
Stainless steel head without side vent/drain
Stainless steel head with side vent/drain
51452864-130
51452864-132
Hastelloy C head without side vent/drain
Hastelloy C head with side vent/drain
51452864-140
51452864-142
Monel head without side vent/drain
Monel head with side vent/drain
51452864-150
51452864-152
Carbon steel head (nickel plated) without side vent/drain
Carbon steel head (nickel plated) with side vent/drain
···································
···································
···································
···································
···································
···································
Quantity
Per Unit
Each Process head Assembly Kit includes:
Pipe Plug (See Note 1, 2.)·····························································
Vent Plug (See Note 1.)································································
Vent Bushing (See Note 1.)··························································
Process Head ··············································································
Gasket (PTFE), Process Head ····················································
Gasket (PTFE), Flange Adapter···················································
NOTE 1 : This item is made of the same material as the
Process Heads, except for Kits with carbon steel Process
Heads, which include stainless steel Pipe Plug, Vent Plug,
and Vent Bushing.
NOTE 2: The Kit for Process Heads without side vent/drain
does not include Pipe Plugs (K1).
2
1
1
1
1
1
Table 5 Pressure Specification and Ratings Summary Comparisons
Transmitter
Model
Upper Range
Limit
Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure
(Note 1)
Overpressure Rating
(Note 1)
Previous
New Design
Previous
New Design
STD110
10 inches H2O
(25 mbar)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
(Same as
previous)
50 psi
(3.5 bar)
(Same as
previous)
STD120,
STD924
400 inches H2O
(1 bar)
3000 psi
(207 bar)
4500 psi
(310 bar)
3000 psi
(207 bar)
4500 psi
(310 bar)
STD125
600 inches H2O
(1.5 bar)
"
"
"
"
STD130,
STD930
100 psi
(7 bar)
"
"
"
"
STD170
3000 psi
(207 bar)
"
"
'"
"
Note 1 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure and Overpressure Rating may vary with materials of
construction and with process temperature. For more specific information, refer to the appropriate
Specification and Model Selection Guide. In transmitters with Graphite Gaskets, rating of 50 psi
remains unchanged while ratings of 4500 psi are reduced to 3625 psi (250 bar). Flange Adapters with
Graphite Gaskets have a 3000 psi rating.
Intentionally blank
34-ST-99-37
10/04
ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter,
Release 300 with HART
Communication Option
Overview
Addendum
(to User Manual
34-ST-25-17)
ATEX Directive 94/6/EC
The ATEX Directive 94/6/EC is a European CE Mark directive concerning products
that are designed for use in potentially explosive environments. This “New
Approach” directive is based on, and is an expansion of, European Norms (EN,
CENELEC standards).
On June 30, 2003, the ATEX (ATmospheres EXplosibles) directive will replace
directives currently in effect, and from that time, only products with the ATEX
certification and with ATEX labeling will be approved for free movement in the EU
(European Union) and EFTA (European Free Trade Association) countries. As
defined in the directive, “free movement” refers to:
−
placing a product on the market, and/or
−
placing a product into service.
The ATEX Directive 94/6/EC is a living (set of) document(s), subject to further
change and refinement, whose details are beyond the scope of this addendum.
Further information can be obtained in the Official Journal of the European
Communities No L100/1, and in related publications such as Guidelines on the
Application of Directive 94/9/EC. Both of these items are available at:
http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/atex/index.htm
Products that have been previously certified under the EN and CENELEC European
Norms, and which comply fully with all standards in the New Approach directive
have, by application, received certification under ATEX Directive 94/6/EC.
The Honeywell ST3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter is now ATEX certified, and all
units manufactured currently and in the future will include labeling that includes all
markings required under the ATEX directive.
Inclusions
To ensure that all required information will be available to the user, the following
items are included with this Addendum for reference:
1.
Declaration of Conformity – ATEX CE0344 (Honeywell document number
51452504 Revision B).
2.
Certificate of Manufacturer – Ex II 3 G, EEx nA IIC ATEX CE (Honeywell
document number 51452622 Revision C).
Purpose and Content
of this Addendum
This Addendum includes information required under the ATEX Directive regarding:
1. The appearance and meaning of each certification mark (CE Mark) that appears on
the label(s) affixed to the product.
2. Instructions for installation and use of the product.
Installation information is given in
34-ST-33-39C - ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300 and Smart Field
Communicator Model STS103 Installation Guide
Information required for use of this product, and additional installation
information, is included in:
34-ST-25-17 - ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Release 300 with HART
Communication Option User Manual
of which this Addendum is a part.
Details regarding certification marks that appear in labeling for this product are given
in this addendum.
Attention
The publications cited above and the functioning and construction (except for
labeling) of the devices described therein are essentially unchanged. The
purpose of this addendum is to provide details the purpose and appearance
of the labels attached to each device under ATEX Directive 94/6/EC.
Attention
Before installing the equipment in a potentially explosive atmosphere, please
read the information provided in this Addendum, which supports the ATEX
certifications for this product.
CE Conformity
The ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter is in conformity with the protection
requirements of the following European Council Directives: 94/9/EC, the Explosive
Atmospheres (ATEX) Directive, 89/336/EEC, the Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) Directive, and the Pressure Equipment (PED) directive.
In conformity with the ATEX directive, the CE mark on the certification nameplate
includes the Notified Body identification number 0344 (KEMA 01ATEXQ3199)
adjacent to the EC Type Examination Certificate number.
In conformity with the Pressure Equipment Directive, models rated greater than 200
bar (2,900 psi) have an additional CE mark applied to the meter body data plate in
accordance with 97/23/EC, Article 15. Models rated at less than 200 bar have no CE
mark on the meter body data plate per 97/23/EC, Article 3, Section 3.
Deviation from the installation conditions in this manual may invalidate this product’s
conformity with the Explosive Atmospheres, Pressure Equipment, and EMC
Directives.
Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be
assumed.
Marking,
ATEX Directive
Honeywell’s Model ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter, with the following
nameplates attached, has been certified to comply with Directive 94/9/EC of the
European Parliament and the Council as published in the Official Journal of the
European Communities No. L 100/1 on 19-April-1994.
The following information is provided as part of the labeling of the transmitter:
Apparatus Marked
with Multiple Types
of Protection
•
Name and Address of the manufacturer: Honeywell, Phoenix, AZ 85053 USA.
•
Notified Body identification: KEMA Quality B.V., Arnhem, the Netherlands
•
For complete model number, see the Model Selection Guide for the particular
model of pressure transmitter.
•
The serial number of the transmitter is located on the Meter Body data-plate. The
first two digits of the serial number identify the year (02) and the second two digits
identify the week of the year (23); for example, 0223xxxxxxxx indicates that the
product was manufactured in 2002, in the 23 rd week.
The user must determine the type of protection required for installation the
equipment. The user shall then check the box [D] adjacent to the type of protection
used on the equipment certification nameplate. Once a type of protection has been
checked on the nameplate, the equipment shall not then be reinstalled using any of the
other certification types.
Nameplate 51452477-001, ia, 4-20 mA / HART, is mounted on the enclosure. The following is a representation
of this nameplate:
Nameplate 51452475-001, d, 4-20 mA / HART, is mounted on the enclosure. The following is a representation of
this nameplate:
Nameplate 51452619-001, nA, 4-20 mA / HART, is mounted on the enclosure. The following is a representation
of this nameplate:
Nameplate 50003886-001, 4-20 mA / HART, multiple certification nameplate. The following is a representation of
this nameplate:
Specific Parameters
for Intrinsic Safety
Field wiring terminals, (+ , –):
Ui = 30 V,
Ii = 100 mA, Pi = 1.2 W
Without local analog meter, ME:
Ci = 4.2 nF,
Ri = 0,
Li = 0
With local analog meter, ME:
Ci = 4.2 nF,
Ri = 0,
Li = 150 µH
With local smart digital meter, SM:
Ci = 4.2 nF,
Ri = 0,
Li = 0
Special conditions for
safe use,
The pressure transmitter is an intrinsically safe apparatus that can be installed in
potentially explosive atmospheres.
Intrinsic Safety (X)
The power terminals (+, -) must be connected only to a certified associated
intrinsically safe apparatus.
The electrical parameters (U, I, and P) of the associated apparatus connected to the
power terminals (+, -) must not exceed the following values:
Ui ≤ 30V Ii ≤ 100 mA Pi ≤ 1,2 W
Ambient temperature: -50ºC to 93ºC
NOTE: -50ºC to 93ºC is the certification and “Operative Limits” for the product
family. Refer to individual Specification Sheets for the standard “Rated Condition”
ambient limits for a particular model that, as shown on the data-plate and
certification nameplate, may be less than the certification limits.
Temperature classifications:
IS (ia) 4 – 20 mA / HART
Flameproof (d)
T4 up to Ta ≤ 93º
T5 up to Ta ≤ 93ºC
T5 up to Ta ≤ 63ºC
T6 up to Ta ≤ 78ºC
T6 up to Ta ≤ 48ºC
Enclosure classification: IP 66/67, Type 4X
Specific Parameters
for Flameproof
Installation
Power supply to field wiring terminals, (+, –): Ucc ≤ 42 V
Output Signal: 4–20 mA / HART
Special conditions
for safe use,
Flameproof
Installation
Specific Parameters
for Non-Sparking
Zone 2 Installtion
(Honeywell certified)
Ambient operating temperature: -50 to 93ºC
NOTE: -50ºC to 93ºC is the certification and “Operative Limits” for the
product family. Refer to individual Specification Sheets for the standard
“Rated Condition” ambient limits for a particular model that, as shown on
the data-plate and certification nameplate, may be less than the
certification limits.
Supply Voltage:
11-42 Vdc
Supply Current:
23 mA
Ambient Temperate Limits:
-50oC to 93oC
Temperature Classification:
T6 at Ta ≤ 78oC
T5 at Ta ≤ 93oC
Special Condition
for Safe Use,
Non-Sparking
Zone 2 Installation
(Honeywell certified)
• The installation of this equipment in Zone 2 hazardous areas must
comply with VDE specification 0165, IEC 60079-14, EN 50021 and/or
valid national standards for installation and operation.
• Before commissioning of this equipment, it must be verified that the
power supply voltage cannot exceed the 42 Vdc maximum for 4-20 mA
analog and DE equipment.
• The electronic assemblies in these units are non-repairable items and if
faulty must be replaced. The electrical power supply must be switched
off before any replacement and during any time that the wiring
terminations are being connected or disconnected.
51452504, Revision B
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
ATEX
0344
We declare under our sole responsibility that the following products,
ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitters, Series 100 and 900,
Release 300 (per attached list)
to which this declaration relates, are in conformity with the protection requirements of Council Directive:
94/9/EC (ATEX Directive) on the approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning
equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, and
89/336/EEC (EMC Directive) as amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility.
The models covered by this Declaration and evidence of conformity with the ATEX Directive are shown on the
attached list. Conformity to the ATEX Directive is in accordance with the following European standards.
EN 50014-1997 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres - General Requirements
EN 50018-2000 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres - Flameproof Enclosure “d”
EN 50020-1994 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres - Intrinsic Safety "i"
EN 50284-1999 Special Requirements for Construction, Test and Marking of Electrical Apparatus of
Equipment Group II, Category 1 G
Notified
Bodies:
Manufacturing
Locations:
EC Type Examination Certificates
LCIE – Groupe Bureau Veritas – 0081
33, Avenue du Général Leclerc
92260 Fontenay-aux-Rose
France
Production Quality Assurance Notification
KEMA Quality B. V. – 0344
Utrechtseweg 310
6812 AR Arnhem
The Netherlands
Honeywell Industrial Solutions
Industrial Solutions
2500 West Union Hills Drive
Phoenix, Arizona 85027 USA
The authorized signatory to this declaration, on behalf of the manufacturer, and the Responsible Person is identified
below.
Honeywell International Inc.
Industrial Measurement & Control
1100 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034 USA
Frederick M. Kent
Standards & Approvals Engineer,
(ATEX Authorized Person)
Issue Date:
18 August, 2002
ST3000, R300 Pressure Transmitters
Certificate
LCIE 02 ATEX 6099
LCIE 02 ATEX 6100X
LCIE 02 ATEX 6101X
LCIE 03 ATEX 6175X
Model
STA122
STA140
STD110
STD120
STD125
STD130
STD170
STF128
STF12F
STF132
STF13F
STF14F
STF14T
STG140
STG14L
STG14T
STG170
STG17L
STG180
STG18L
STR12D
STR13D
STR14A
STR14G
STR17G
STA922
STA940
STD924
STD930
STD974
STF904
STF924
STF92F
STF932
STF93F
STG19L
STG93P
STG944
STG94L
STG974
STG97L
STG98L
STG99L
STR93D
STR94G
Series
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
Protection
Ex II 2 G, EEx d IIC, T6 or T5
Ex II 2 G, EEx ia IIC, T6 to T4
Ex II 1 G, EEx ia IIC, T6 to T4
Ex II 1 G, EEx ia IIC, T6 to T4
Model
ST……-3D
ST……-3S
ST…-HC…-3S
ST…-HC…-3S
Description
4-20 mA / DE / HART / Fieldbus
4-20 mA / DE
4-20 mA / HART
Foundation TM Fieldbus
Description
Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
High Temperature Flange Mounted Pressure Transmitter
Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Gauge Pressure Transmitter
High Temperature Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
High Pressure Gauge Transmitter
Flush Mount Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
In-Line Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
In-Line Gauge Pressure Transmitter
In-Line Gauge Pressure Transmitter
High Pressure Gauge Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Factory
Phoenix
Phoenix
Phoenix
Phoenix
51452622, Revision C
Certificate of Manufacturer
II 3 G EEx nA IIC ATEX
This certificate applies to the following equipment:
ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitters, Series 100 and 900, Release 100 and 900, 4-20 mA,
DE, HART, and FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus (per attached list)
This equipment has no arcing or sparking parts and no ignition-capable hot surfaces, and therefore conforms to
Clause 6.3.1.3 of VDE 0165/2.91, IEC 60079-14, and EN 50021 for operation in Zone 2 hazardous areas providing
that the following conditions are observed. The equipment contains no intrinsically safe or energy-limiting
components. The listed equipment are 2-wire devices that receive their power and signal carrier from the same 420 mA signal current or Fieldbus supply. In normal operation, the maximum current supply is 23 mA for ≤ 4-20
mA analog, DE or HART, and ≤ 260 mA for Fieldbus.
Conditions for the application of the above equipment in Zone 2 hazardous areas:
The installation of this equipment in Zone 2 hazardous areas must comply with VDE specification 0165, IEC
60079-14, EN 50021 and/or valid national standards for installation and operation.
Before commissioning this equipment, it must be verified that the power supply voltage cannot exceed the 42 Vdc
maximum for 4-20 mA analog, DE and HART equipment, and 24 Vdc for Fieldbus equipment.
The electronic assemblies in these units are non-repairable items and if faulty, must be replaced. The electrical
power supply must be switched off before any replacement and during any time that the wiring terminations are
being connected or disconnected.
The technical data supplied by the manufacturer must be adhered to.
Specifications for Use in Zone 2
4-20 mA / DE / HART
Fieldbus
Supply Voltage:
11 – 42 Vdc
10 – 24 Vdc
Supply Current:
23 mA
260 mA
Ambient temperature limits:
–50 to 93ºC
Temperature Classification:
Manufacturing Location:
T6 at Ta ≤ 78ºC
T5 at Ta ≤ 93ºC
Honeywell Process Solutions
2500 West Union Hills Drive
Phoenix, Arizona 85027 USA
Honeywell International Inc.
Industrial Measurement & Control
1100 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034 USA
Frederick M. Kent
Standards & Approvals Engineer,
(ATEX Authorized Person)
Issue Date:
25 June 2004
ST3000, R300 Pressure Transmitters
Model
STA122
STA140
STD110
STD120
STD125
STD130
STD170
STF128
STF12F
STF132
STF13F
STF14F
STF14T
STG140
STG14L
STG14T
STG170
STG17L
STG180
STG18L
STR12D
STR13D
STR14A
STR14G
STR17G
STA922
STA940
STD924
STD930
STD974
STF904
STF924
STF92F
STF932
STF93F
STG19L
STG93P
STG944
STG94L
STG974
STG97L
STG98L
STG99L
STR93D
STR94G
Series
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
Description
Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
High Temperature Pressure Transmitter
Gage Pressure Transmitter
Gage Pressure Transmitter
High Temperature Pressure Transmitter
Gage Pressure Transmitter
Gage Pressure Transmitter
Gage Pressure Transmitter
Gage Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter
High Pressure Gauge Transmitter
Flush Mount Gage Pressure Transmitter
Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
In-Line Gage Pressure Transmitter
Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter
In-Line Gauge Pressure Transmitter
In-Line Gauge Pressure Transmitter
High Pressure Gauge Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter
Industrial Measurement and Control
Honeywell International, Inc.
2500 W. Union Hill Drive
Phoenix, Arizona 85027